WO2000071152A1 - Facteur 10 de croissance des fibroblastes - Google Patents

Facteur 10 de croissance des fibroblastes Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2000071152A1
WO2000071152A1 PCT/US2000/013573 US0013573W WO0071152A1 WO 2000071152 A1 WO2000071152 A1 WO 2000071152A1 US 0013573 W US0013573 W US 0013573W WO 0071152 A1 WO0071152 A1 WO 0071152A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
polypeptide
replaced
fgf
seq
sequence
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2000/013573
Other languages
English (en)
Other versions
WO2000071152A9 (fr
Inventor
Craig A. Rosen
Ralph Alderson
Robert Melder
D. Roxanne Duan
Jing-Shan Hu
Jeannine D. Gocayne
Original Assignee
Human Genome Sciences, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Human Genome Sciences, Inc. filed Critical Human Genome Sciences, Inc.
Priority to AU54408/00A priority Critical patent/AU5440800A/en
Publication of WO2000071152A1 publication Critical patent/WO2000071152A1/fr
Publication of WO2000071152A9 publication Critical patent/WO2000071152A9/fr

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/18—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans
    • C07K16/22—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against growth factors ; against growth regulators
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/475—Growth factors; Growth regulators
    • C07K14/50—Fibroblast growth factor [FGF]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K48/00—Medicinal preparations containing genetic material which is inserted into cells of the living body to treat genetic diseases; Gene therapy
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00—Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/60—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by non-natural combinations of immunoglobulin fragments
    • C07K2317/62—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by non-natural combinations of immunoglobulin fragments comprising only variable region components
    • C07K2317/622—Single chain antibody (scFv)
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2799/00—Uses of viruses
    • C12N2799/02—Uses of viruses as vector
    • C12N2799/021—Uses of viruses as vector for the expression of a heterologous nucleic acid
    • C12N2799/026—Uses of viruses as vector for the expression of a heterologous nucleic acid where the vector is derived from a baculovirus

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a novel human gene encoding a polypeptide which is a member of the Fibroblast Growth Factor family. More specifically, the present invention relates to a polynucleotide encoding a novel human polypeptide named Fibroblast Growth Factor 10, or "FGF-10.” This invention also relates to FGF-10 polypeptides, as well as vectors, host cells, antibodies directed to FGF-10 polypeptides, and the recombinant methods for producing the same. Also provided are diagnostic methods for detecting, treating, and/or preventing disorders. The invention further relates to screening methods for identifying agonists and antagonists of FGF-10 activity.
  • Fibroblast growth factors are a family of proteins characteristic of binding to heparin and are, therefore, also called heparin binding growth factors (HBGF). Expression of different members of these proteins are found in various tissues and are under particular temporal and spatial control. These proteins are potent mitogens for a variety of cells of mesodermal, ectodermal, and endodermal origin, including fibroblasts, coraeal and vascular endothelial cells, granulocytes, adrenal cortical cells, chondrocytes, myoblasts, vascular smooth muscle cells, lens epithelial cells, melanocytes, keratinocytes, oligodendrocytes, astrocytes, osteoblasts, and hematopoietic cells.
  • fibroblasts coraeal and vascular endothelial cells
  • granulocytes granulocytes
  • adrenal cortical cells chondrocytes
  • myoblasts myoblasts
  • vascular smooth muscle cells lens epitheli
  • FGF-1 and 2 are chemotactic for endothelial cells and FGF-2 has been shown to enable endothelial cells to penetrate the basement membrane. Consistent with these properties, both FGF-1 and 2 have the capacity to stimulate angiogenesis. Another important feature of these growth factors is their ability to promote wound healing. Many other members of the FGF family share similar activities with FGF-1 and 2 such as promoting angiogenesis and wound healing. Several members of the FGF family have been shown to induce mesoderm formation and to modulate differentiation of neuronal cells, adipocytes and skeletal muscle cells.
  • FGF proteins have been implicated in promoting tumorigenesis in carcinomas and sarcomas by promoting tumor vascularization and as transforming proteins when their expression is deregulated.
  • the FGF family presently consists of eight structurally-related polypeptides: basic FGF, acidic FGF, int 2, hst 1/k-FGF, FGF-5, FGF-6, keratinocyte growth factor, AIGF (FGF-8) and recently a glia-activating factor has been shown to be a novel heparin-binding growth factor which was purified from the culture supernatant of a human glioma cell line (Miyamoto, M. et al., Mol. and Cell.
  • FGF-1 expression induced intimal thickening in porcine arteries 21 days after gene transfer (Nabel, E.G., et al., Nature, 362:844-6 (1993)). It has further been demonstrated that basic fibroblast growth factor may regulate glioma growth and progression independent of its role in tumor angiogenesis and that basic fibroblast growth factor release or secretion may be required for these actions (Morrison, R.S., et al., J. Neurosci. Res., 34:502-9 (1993)).
  • Fibroblast growth factors such as basic FGF
  • basic FGF have further been implicated in the growth of Kaposi's sarcoma cells in vitro (Huang, Y.Q., et al., J. Clin. Invest., 91: 1191-7 (1993)).
  • the cDNA sequence encoding human basic fibroblast growth factor has been cloned downstream of a transcription promoter recognized by the bacteriophage T7 RNA polymerase.
  • Basic fibroblast growth factors so obtained have been shown to have biological activity indistinguishable from human placental fibroblast growth factor in mitogenicity, synthesis of plasminogen activator and angiogenesis assays (Squires, C.H., et al., J. Biol.
  • U.S. Patent No. 5,155,214 discloses substantially pure mammalian basic fibroblast growth factors and their production. The amino acid sequences of bovine and human basic fibroblast growth factor are disclosed, as well as the DNA sequence encoding the polypeptide of the bovine species.
  • FGF-9 has around 30% sequence similarity to other members of the FGF family. Two cysteine residues and other consensus sequences in family members were also well conserved in the FGF-9 sequence. FGF-9 was found to have no typical signal sequence in its N terminus like those in acidic and basic FGF. However, FGF-9 was found to be secreted from cells after synthesis despite its lack of a typical signal sequence FGF (Miyamoto, M. et al., Mol. and Cell. Biol., 13(7):4251-4259 (1993).
  • FGF-9 was found to stimulate the cell growth of oligodendrocyte type 2 astrocyte progenitor cells, BALB/c3T3, and PC-12 cells but not that of human umbilical vein endothelial cells (Naruo, K., et al., J. Biol. Chem., 268:2857-2864 (1993).
  • Basic FGF and acidic FGF are potent modulators of cell proliferation, cell motility, differentiation, and survival and act on cell types from ectoderm, mesoderm and endoderm. These two FGFs, along with KGF and AIGF, were identified by protein purification. However, the other four members were isolated as oncogenes., expression of which was restricted to embryogenesis and certian types of cancers. FGF-9 was demonstrated to be a mitogen against glial cells. Members of the FGF family are reported to have oncogenic potency. FGF-9 has shown transforming potency when transformed into BALB/c3T3 cells (Miyamoto, M., et al., Mol. Cell. Biol., 13(7):4251-4259 (1993).
  • AIGF Androgen induced growth factor
  • SC-3 mouse mammary carcinoma cells
  • AIGF is a distinctive FGF-like growth factor, having a putative signal peptide and sharing 30-40% homology with known members of the FGF family.
  • Mammalian cells transformed with AIGF shows a remarkable stimulatory effect on the growth of SC-3 cells in the absence of androgen. Therefore, AIGF mediates androgen-induced growth of SC-3 cells, and perhaps other cells, since it is secreted by the tumor cells themselves.
  • polypeptide of the present invention has been putatively identified as a member of the FGF family as a result of amino acid sequence homology with other members of the FGF family.
  • novel mature polypeptides as well as biologically active and diagnostically or therapeutically useful fragments, analogs and derivatives thereof.
  • the polypeptides of the present invention are of human origin.
  • nucleic acid molecules encoding the polypeptides of the present invention, including mRNAs, DNAs, cDNAs, genomic DNA, as well as antisense analogs thereof and biologically active and diagnostically or therapeutically useful fragments thereof.
  • the present invention provides isolated nucleic acid molecules comprising a polynucleotide encoding at least a portion of the FGF-10 polypeptide having the complete amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:2 or the complete amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA clone deposited as plasmid DNA in a bacterial host as ATCC Deposit Number 75696 on March 4, 1994.
  • the nucleotide sequence determined by sequencing the deposited FGF-10 clone which is shown in Figures 1A-B (SEQ ID NO: l), contains an open reading frame encoding a complete polypeptide of 181 amino acid residues, including an initiation codon encoding an N-terminal methionine at nucleotide position 210.
  • Nucleic acid molecules of the invention include those encoding the complete amino acid sequence excepting the N- terminal methionine shown in SEQ ID NO:2, or the complete amino acid sequence excepting the N-terminal methionine encoded by the cDNA clone in ATCC Deposit Number 75696, which molecules also can encode additional amino acids fused to the N-terminus of the FGF-10 amino acid sequence.
  • one aspect of the invention provides an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of: (a) a nucleotide sequence encoding the FGF-10 polypeptide having the complete amino acid sequence in SEQ ID NO:2 excepting the N-terminal methionine (i.e., positions 2 to 181 of SEQ ID NO:2); (b) a nucleotide sequence encoding the predicted mature FGF-10 polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:2; (c) a nucleotide sequence encoding the FGF-10 polypeptide having the complete amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA clone contained in ATCC Deposit No.
  • nucleic acid molecules that comprise a polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence at least 90% identical, and more preferably at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical, to any of the nucleotide sequences in (a), (b), (c), (d) or (e), above, or a polynucleotide which hybridizes under stringent hybridization conditions to a polynucleotide in (a), (b), (c), (d) or (e), above.
  • This polynucleotide which hybridizes does not hybridize under stringent hybridization conditions to a polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence consisting of only A residues or of only T residues.
  • An additional nucleic acid embodiment of the invention relates to an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a polynucleotide which encodes the amino acid sequence of an epitope-bearing portion of an FGF-10 polypeptide having an amino acid sequence in (a), (b), (c) or (d), above.
  • processes for producing such polypeptides by recombinant techniques through the use of recombinant vectors, such as cloning and expression plasmids useful as reagents in the recombinant production of the polypeptides of the present ' invention, as well as recombinant prokaryotic and/or eukaryotic host cells comprising a nucleic acid sequence encoding a polypeptide of the present invention.
  • recombinant vectors such as cloning and expression plasmids useful as reagents in the recombinant production of the polypeptides of the present ' invention, as well as recombinant prokaryotic and/or eukaryotic host cells comprising a nucleic acid sequence encoding a polypeptide of the present invention.
  • antibodies against such polypeptides are provided.
  • nucleic acid probes comprising nucleic acid molecules of sufficient length to specifically hybridize to a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide of the present invention.
  • the invention provides an isolated antibody that binds specifically to an FGF-10 polypeptide having an amino acid sequence described in (a), (b), (c) or (d) above.
  • the invention further provides methods for isolating antibodies that bind specifically to an FGF-10 polypeptide having an amino acid sequence as described herein. Such antibodies are useful diagnostically or therapeutically as described below.
  • diagnostic assays for detecting diseases or susceptibility to diseases related to mutations in a nucleic acid sequence of the present invention and for detecting over- expression or under-expression of the polypeptides encoded by such sequences.
  • the invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising FGF-10 polypeptides, particularly human FGF-10 polypeptides. Methods of treating individuals in need of FGF-10 polypeptides are also provided.
  • compositions comprising an FGF-10 polynucleotide or an FGF-10 polypeptide for administration to cells in vitro, to cells ex vivo and to cells in vivo, or to a multiceliular organism.
  • the compositions comprise an FGF-10 polynucleotide for expression of an FGF-10 polypeptide in a host organism for treatment and/or prevention of disease.
  • Particularly preferred in this regard is expression in a human patient for treatment and/or prevention of a dysfunction associated with aberrant endogenous activity of an FGF-10 gene.
  • Figures 1A-B depicts the nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO:l) of the human mRNA encoding FGF-10 and the deduced amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO:2) of the FGF-10 polypeptide.
  • Figures 2A-B show an alignment of the regions of identity among the amino acid sequences of the human FGF-10 protein and the amino acid sequences of the following human proteins: FGF-1 (SEQ ID NO:3), FGF-2 (SEQ ID NO:4), FGF-4 (SEQ ID NO:5), FGF-6 (SEQ ID NO:6), FGF-5 (SEQ ID NO:7), FGF-9 (SEQ ID NO:8), FGF-3 (SEQ ID NO:9), FGF-7 (SEQ ID NO: 10), as determined by the "Megalign" routine of the DNAStar program.
  • FGF-1 SEQ ID NO:3
  • FGF-2 SEQ ID NO:4
  • FGF-4 SEQ ID NO:5
  • FGF-6 SEQ ID NO:6
  • FGF-5
  • Figure 3 shows an analysis of the FGF-10 amino acid sequence. Alpha, beta, turn and coil regions; hydrophilicity and hydrophobicity; amphipathic regions; flexible regions; antigenic index and surface probability are shown, and all were generated using the default settings.
  • the positive peaks indicate locations of the highly antigenic regions of the FGF-10 protein, i.e., regions from which epitope-bearing peptides of the invention can be obtained. The domains defined by these graphs are contemplated by the present invention.
  • the data presented in Figure 3 are also represented in tabular form in Table 1.
  • Figure 4 shows an SDS-PAGE gel after in vitro transcription/translation of FGF-10 protein.
  • Figure 5 shows the tissue distribution of FGF-10 mRNA in human adult tissues.
  • isolated refers to material removed from its original environment (e.g., the natural environment if it is naturally occurring), and thus is altered “by the hand of man” from its natural state.
  • an isolated polynucleotide could be part of a vector or a composition of matter, or could be contained within a cell, and still be “isolated” because that vector, composition of matter, or particular cell is not the original environment of the polynucleotide.
  • a "secreted" FGF-10 protein refers to a protein capable of being directed to the ER, secretory vesicles, or the extracellular space as a result of a signal sequence, as well as a FGF-10 protein released into the extracellular space without necessarily containing a signal sequence. If the FGF-10 secreted protein is released into the extracellular space, the FGF-10 secreted protein can undergo extracellular processing to produce a "mature" FGF-10 protein. Release into the extracellular space can occur by many mechanisms, including exocytosis and proteolytic cleavage.
  • the polynucleotides of the present invention may also encode for a mature protein, or for a proprotein having a prosequence or for a pre-proprotein having both a prosequence and a presequence (or leader sequence).
  • the proprotein and/or the pre- proprotein may be inactive. Once the prosequence and/or the presequence is cleaved, the mature form is activated.
  • a FGF-10 "polynucleotide” refers to a molecule having a nucleic acid sequence contained in SEQ ID NO: 1 or the cDNA contained within the clone deposited with the ATCC.
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotide can contain the nucleotide sequence of the full length cDNA sequence, including the 5' and 3 ' untranslated sequences, the coding region, with or without the signal sequence, the secreted protein coding region, as well as fragments, epitopes, domains, and variants of the nucleic acid sequence.
  • a FGF-10 "polypeptide” refers to a molecule having the translated amino acid sequence generated from the polynucleotide as broadly defined.
  • the polynucleotides of the invention are less than 300 kb, 200 kb, 100 kb, 50 kb, 15 kb, 10 kb, or 7.5 kb in length.
  • polynucleotides of the invention comprise at least 15 contiguous nucleotides of FGF-10 coding sequence, but do not comprise all or a portion of any FGF-10 intron.
  • the nucleic acid comprising FGF-10 coding sequence does not contain coding sequences of a genomic flanking gene (i.e., 5' or 3 ' to the FGF-10 gene in the genome).
  • nucleic acids of the invention are the above protein sequences together with additional, non-coding sequences, including for example, but not limited to introns and non-coding 5' and 3' sequences, such as the transcribed, non-translated sequences that play a role in transcription, mRNA processing, including splicing and polyadenylation signals, for example - ribosome binding and stability of mRNA; an additional coding sequence which codes for additional amino acids, such as those which provide additional functionalities.
  • additional, non-coding sequence identified as SEQ ID amino acids
  • NO:l was generated by overlapping sequences of the deposited clone (contig analysis). A representative clone containing all or most of the sequence for SEQ ID NO:l
  • ATCC Deposit Number 75696 The ATCC is located at 10801 University Boulevard, Manassas, VA 20110-2209, USA. The ATCC deposit was made pursuant to the terms of the Budapest Treaty on the international recognition of the deposit of microorganisms for purposes of patent procedure.
  • a FGF-10 "polynucleotide” also includes those polynucleotides capable of hybridizing, under stringent hybridization conditions, to sequences contained in SEQ ID NO: l, the complement thereof, or the cDNA within the deposited clone.
  • Stringent hybridization conditions refers to an overnight incubation at 42 degree C in a solution comprising 50% formamide, 5x SSC (750 mM NaCI, 75 mM sodium citrate), 50 mM sodium phosphate (pH 7.6), 5x Denhardt's solution, 10% dextran sulfate, and 20 ⁇ g/ml denatured, sheared salmon sperm DNA, followed by washing the filters in 0. lx SSC at about 65 degree C.
  • nucleic acid molecules that hybridize to the FGF-10 polynucleotides at moderatetly high stringency hybridization conditions. Changes in the stringency of hybridization and signal detection are primarily accomplished through the manipulation of formamide concentration (lower percentages of formamide result in lowered stringency); salt conditions, or temperature.
  • washes performed following stringent hybridization can be done at higher salt concentrations (e.g. 5X SSC).
  • blocking reagents include Denhardt's reagent, BLOTTO, heparin, denatured salmon sperm DNA, and commercially available proprietary formulations.
  • the inclusion of specific blocking reagents may require modification of the hybridization conditions described above, due to problems with compatibility.
  • polynucleotide which hybridizes only to polyA+ sequences (such as any 3' terminal polyA+ tract of a cDNA shown in the sequence listing), or to a complementary stretch of T (or U) residues, would not be included in the definition of "polynucleotide," since such a polynucleotide would hybridize to any nucleic acid molecule containing a poly (A) stretch or the complement thereof (e.g., practically any double-stranded cDNA clone).
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotide can be composed of any polyribonucleotide or polydeoxribonucleotide, which may be unmodified RNA or DNA or modified RNA or DNA.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides can be composed of single- and double-stranded DNA, DNA that is a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, single- and double-stranded RNA, and RNA that is mixture of single- and double- stranded regions, hybrid molecules comprising DNA and RNA that may be single- stranded or, more typically, double-stranded or a mixture of single- and double- stranded regions.
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotides can be composed of triple- stranded regions comprising RNA or DNA or both RNA and DNA.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides may also contain one or more modified bases or DNA or RNA backbones modified for stability or for other reasons.
  • Modified bases include, for example, tritylated bases and unusual bases such as inosine.
  • polynucleotide embraces chemically, enzymatically, or metabolically modified forms.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides can be composed of amino acids joined to each other by peptide bonds or modified peptide bonds, i.e., peptide isosteres, and may contain amino acids other than the 20 gene-encoded amino acids.
  • the FGF-10 polypeptides may be modified by either natural processes, such as posttranslational processing, or by chemical modification techniques which are well known in the art. Such modifications are well described in basic texts and in more detailed monographs, as well as in a voluminous research literature. Modifications can occur anywhere in the FGF-10 polypeptide, including the peptide backbone, the amino acid side-chains and the amino or carboxyl termini.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides may be branched, for example, as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be cyclic, with or without branching. Cyclic, branched, and branched cyclic FGF-10 polypeptides may result from posttranslation natural processes or may be made by synthetic methods.
  • Modifications include acetylation, acylation, ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin, covalent attachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphotidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, cleavage of the peptide bond, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent cross-links, formation of cysteine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma-carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation, pegylation, proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation, racemization, selenoylation, sulfation, transfer-RNA mediated addition of amino acids to proteins such as arginylation, and
  • SEQ ID NO:l refers to a FGF-10 polynucleotide sequence while “SEQ ID NO:2” refers to a FGF-10 polypeptide sequence.
  • a FGF-10 polypeptide "having biological activity” refers to polypeptides exhibiting activity similar, but not necessarily identical to, an activity of a FGF-10 polypeptide, including mature forms, as measured in a particular biological assay, with or without dose dependency.
  • the candidate polypeptide will exhibit greater activity or not more than about 25- fold less and, preferably, not more than about tenfold less activity, and most preferably, not more than about three-fold less activity relative to the FGF-10 polypeptide.
  • the present invention provides isolated nucleic acid molecules comprising a polynucleotide encoding an FGF-10 polypeptide having the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:2, which was determined by sequencing cloned cDNAs.
  • the nucleotide sequence shown in Figures 1A-B (SEQ ID NO: l) was obtained by sequencing the HAGAT55 clone, which was deposited March 4, 1994 at the American Type Culture Collection, 10801 University Boulevard, Manassas, VA 20110-2209, and given accession number ATCC 75696.
  • the FGF-10 polypeptide is structurally related to all members of the fibroblast growth factor family and contains an open reading frame encoding a polypeptide of 181 amino acids (SEQ ID NO:2). Among the top matches are: 1) 37 % identity and 67 % similarity to human FGF-9 isolated from brain over a stretch of 121 amino acids; 2) 33 % identity and 55 % similarity with human FGF-1 (acidic FGF) over a stretch of 110 amino acids. An alignment of the FGF-10 amino acid sequence with the amino acids sequences of various human polypeptides is shown in Figures 2A-B.
  • SEQ ID NO:21 is conserved in the polypeptide of the present invention (X means any amino acid residue; (S, T, A, G) means either S or T or A or G; (D, E) means either D or E residue; X6 means any 6 amino acid residues).
  • nucleic acid molecule of the present invention encoding an FGF-10 polypeptide may be obtained using standard cloning and screening procedures, such as those for cloning cDNAs using mRNA as starting material.
  • standard cloning and screening procedures such as those for cloning cDNAs using mRNA as starting material.
  • nucleic acid molecule described in Figures 1A-B SEQ ID NO:l was discovered in a cDNA library derived from 8 week old early stage human tissue and subsequently the full length cDNA was found in a library derived from the human Amygdala.
  • the determined nucleotide sequence of the FGF-10 cDNA of Figures 1A-B contains an open reading frame encoding a protein of 181 amino acid residues, with an initiation codon at nucleotide position 210 of the nucleotide sequence in Figures 1A-B (SEQ ID NO: l).
  • the actual FGF-10 polypeptide encoded by the deposited cDNA which comprises about 181 amino acids at the C- terminal end of the sequence in SEQ ID NO:2, may be somewhat longer or shorter than the determined sequence. More generally, the actual open reading frame may be anywhere in the range of ⁇ 20 amino acids, more likely in the range of ⁇ 10 amino acids, of that predicted from the N-terminus shown in Figures 1 A-B (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • SEQ ID NO:l and the translated SEQ ID NO:2 are sufficiently accurate and otherwise suitable for a variety of uses well known in the art and described further below.
  • SEQ ID NO:l is useful for designing nucleic acid hybridization probes that will detect nucleic acid sequences contained in SEQ ID NO:l or the cDNA contained in the deposited clone. These probes will also hybridize to nucleic acid molecules in biological samples, thereby enabling a variety of forensic and diagnostic methods of the invention.
  • polypeptides identified from SEQ ID NO:2 may be used to generate antibodies which bind specifically to FGF-10 .
  • DNA sequences generated by sequencing reactions can contain sequencing errors.
  • the errors exist as misidentified nucleotides, or as insertions or deletions of nucleotides in the generated DNA sequence.
  • the erroneously inserted or deleted nucleotides cause frame shifts in the reading frames of the predicted amino acid sequence.
  • the predicted amino acid sequence diverges from the actual amino acid sequence, even though the generated DNA sequence may be greater than 99.9% identical to the actual DNA sequence (for example, one base insertion or deletion in an open reading frame of over 1000 bases).
  • the present invention provides not only the generated nucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ID NO: 1 and the predicted translated amino acid sequence identified as SEQ ID NO:2, but also a sample of plasmid DNA containing a human cDNA of FGF-10 deposited with the ATCC.
  • the nucleotide sequence of the deposited FGF-10 clone can readily be determined by sequencing the deposited clone in accordance with known methods. The predicted FGF-10 amino acid sequence can then be verified from such deposits.
  • amino acid sequence of the protein encoded by the deposited clone can also be directly determined by peptide sequencing or by expressing the protein in a suitable host cell containing the deposited human FGF-10 cDNA, collecting the protein, and determining its sequence.
  • the present invention also relates to the FGF-10 gene corresponding to SEQ ID NO:l, SEQ ID NO:2, or the deposited clone.
  • the FGF-10 gene can be isolated in accordance with known methods using the sequence information disclosed herein. Such methods include preparing probes or primers from the disclosed sequence and identifying or amplifying the FGF-10 gene from appropriate sources of genomic material. Also provided in the present invention are species homologs of FGF-10.
  • Species homologs may be isolated and identified by making suitable probes or primers from the sequences provided herein and screening a suitable nucleic acid source for the desired homologue.
  • the FGF-10 polypeptides can be prepared in any suitable manner.
  • Such polypeptides include isolated naturally occurring polypeptides, recombinantly produced polypeptides, synthetically produced polypeptides, or polypeptides produced by a combination of these methods. Means for preparing such polypeptides are well understood in the art.
  • the FGF-10 polypeptides may be in the form of the secreted protein, including the mature form, or may be a part of a larger protein, such as a fusion protein (see below). It is often advantageous to include an additional amino acid sequence which contains secretory or leader sequences, pro-sequences, sequences which aid in purification, such as multiple histidine residues, or an additional sequence for stability during recombinant production.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides are preferably provided in an isolated form, and preferably are substantially purified.
  • a recombinantly produced version of a FGF-10 polypeptide, including the secreted polypeptide can be substantially purified by the one-step method described in Smith and Johnson, Gene 67:31-40 (1988).
  • FGF-10 polypeptides also can be purified from natural or recombinant sources using antibodies of the invention raised against the FGF-10 protein in methods which are well known in the art.
  • Variant refers to a polynucleotide or polypeptide differing from the FGF-10 polynucleotide or polypeptide, but retaining essential properties thereof. Generally, variants are overall closely similar, and, in many regions, identical to the FGF-10 polynucleotide or polypeptide.
  • nucleotide sequence of the polynucleotide is identical to the reference sequence except that the polynucleotide sequence may include up to five point mutations per each 100 nucleotides of the reference nucleotide sequence encoding the FGF-10 polypeptide.
  • a polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence at least 95% identical to a reference nucleotide sequence up to 5% of the nucleotides in the reference sequence may be deleted or substituted with another nucleotide, or a number of nucleotides up to 5% of the total nucleotides in the reference sequence may be inserted into the reference sequence.
  • the query sequence may be an entire sequence shown of SEQ ID NO: 1 , the ORF (open reading frame), or any fragment specified as described herein.
  • nucleic acid molecule or polypeptide is at least 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to a nucleotide sequence of the presence invention can be determined conventionally using known computer programs.
  • a preferred method for determining the best overall match between a query sequence (a sequence of the present invention) and a subject sequence, also referred to as a global sequence alignment can be determined using the FASTDB computer program based on the algorithm of Brutlag et al. (Comp. App. Biosci. (1990) 6:237-245.)
  • a sequence alignment the query and subject sequences are both DNA sequences.
  • An RNA sequence can be compared by converting U's to T's.
  • the result of said global sequence alignment is in percent identity.
  • the percent identity is corrected by calculating the number of bases of the query sequence that are 5' and 3' of the subject sequence, which are not matched/aligned, as a percent of the total bases of the query sequence. Whether a nucleotide is matched/aligned is determined by results of the FASTDB sequence alignment.
  • This percentage is then subtracted from the percent identity, calculated by the above FASTDB program using the specified parameters, to arrive at a final percent identity score.
  • This corrected score is what is used for the purposes of the present invention. Only bases outside the 5' and 3' bases of the subject sequence, as displayed by the FASTDB alignment, which are not matched/aligned with the query sequence, are calculated for the purposes of manually adjusting the percent identity score.
  • a 90 base subject sequence is aligned to a 100 base query sequence to determine percent identity.
  • the deletions occur at the 5' end of the subject sequence and therefore, the FASTDB alignment does not show a matched/alignment of the first 10 bases at 5' end.
  • the 10 unpaired bases represent 10% of the sequence (number of bases at the 5' and 3' ends not matched/total number of bases in the query sequence) so 10% is subtracted from the percent identity score calculated by the FASTDB program. If the remaining 90 bases were perfectly matched the final percent identity would be 90%.
  • a 90 base subject sequence is compared with a 100 base query sequence.
  • deletions are internal deletions so that there are no bases on the 5' or 3' of the subject sequence which are not matched/aligned with the query.
  • percent identity calculated by FASTDB is not manually corrected.
  • bases 5' and 3' of the subject sequence which are not matched/aligned with the query sequence are manually corrected for. No other manual corrections are to made for the purposes of the present invention.
  • a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence at least, for example, 95% "identical" to a query amino acid sequence of the present invention it is intended that the amino acid sequence of the subject polypeptide is identical to the query sequence except that the subject polypeptide sequence may include up to five amino acid alterations per each 100 amino acids of the query amino acid sequence.
  • the amino acid sequence of the subject polypeptide may include up to five amino acid alterations per each 100 amino acids of the query amino acid sequence.
  • up to 5% of the amino acid residues in the subject sequence may be inserted, deleted, (indels) or substituted with another amino acid.
  • These alterations of the reference sequence may occur at the amino or carboxy terminal positions of the reference amino acid sequence or anywhere between those terminal positions, interspersed either individually among residues in the reference sequence or in one or more contiguous groups within the reference sequence.
  • any particular polypeptide is at least 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to, for instance, the amino acid sequences shown in SEQ ID NO:2 or to the amino acid sequence encoded by deposited DNA clone can be determined conventionally using known computer programs.
  • a preferred method for determining the best overall match between a query sequence (a sequence of the present invention) and a subject sequence, also referred to as a global sequence alignment, can be determined using the FASTDB computer program based on the algorithm of Brutlag et al. (Comp. App. Biosci. (1990) 6:237-245).
  • the query and subject sequences are either both nucleotide sequences or both amino acid sequences.
  • the result of said global sequence alignment is in percent identity.
  • the percent identity is corrected by calculating the number of residues of the query sequence that are N- and C-terminal of the subject sequence, which are not matched/aligned with a corresponding subject residue, as a percent of the total bases of the query sequence. Whether a residue is matched/aligned is determined by results of the FASTDB sequence alignment.
  • This percentage is then subtracted from the percent identity, calculated by the above FASTDB program using the specified parameters, to arrive at a final percent identity score.
  • This final percent identity score is what is used for the purposes of the present invention. Only residues to the N- and C-termini of the subject sequence, which are not matched/aligned with the query sequence, are considered for the purposes of manually adjusting the percent identity score. That is, only query residue positions outside the farthest N- and C-terminal residues of the subject sequence. For example, a 90 amino acid residue subject sequence is aligned with a 100 residue query sequence to determine percent identity.
  • the deletion occurs at the N- terminus of the subject sequence and therefore, the FASTDB alignment does not show a matching/alignment of the first 10 residues at the N-terminus.
  • the 10 unpaired residues represent 10% of the sequence (number of residues at the N- and C- termini not matched/total number of residues in the query sequence) so 10% is subtracted from the percent identity score calculated by the FASTDB program. If the remaining 90 residues were perfectly matched the final percent identity would be 90%.
  • a 90 residue subject sequence is compared with a 100 residue query sequence. This time the deletions are internal deletions so there are no residues at the N- or C-termini of the subject sequence which are not matched/aligned with the query.
  • the FGF-10 variants may contain alterations in the coding regions, non- coding regions, or both.
  • polynucleotide variants containing alterations which produce silent substitutions, additions, or deletions, but do not alter the properties or activities of the encoded polypeptide are preferred.
  • nucleotide variants produced by silent substitutions due to the degeneracy of the genetic code are preferred.
  • variants in which 5-10, 1-5, or 1-2 amino acids are substituted, deleted, or added in any combination are also preferred.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotide variants can be produced for a variety of reasons, e.g., to optimize codon expression for a particular host (change codons in the human mRNA to those preferred by a bacterial host such as E. coli).
  • Naturally occurring FGF-10 variants are called "allelic variants," and refer to one of several alternate forms of a gene occupying a given locus on a chromosome of an organism. (Genes II, Lewin, B., ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York (1985).) These allelic variants can vary at either the polynucleotide and/or polypeptide level. Alternatively, non-naturally occurring variants may be produced by mutagenesis techniques or by direct synthesis.
  • variants may be generated to improve or alter the characteristics of the FGF-10 polypeptides. For instance, one or more amino acids can be deleted from the N-terminus or C-terminus of the secreted protein without substantial loss of biological function.
  • Interferon gamma exhibited up to ten times higher activity after deleting 8-10 amino acid residues from the carboxy terminus of this protein. (Dobeli et al., J. Biotechnology 7: 199-216 (1988).)
  • the invention further includes FGF-10 polypeptide variants which show substantial biological activity.
  • Such variants include deletions, insertions, inversions, repeats, and substitutions selected according to general rules known in the art so as have little effect on activity.
  • the present application is directed to nucleic acid molecules at least 90%,
  • nucleic acid sequences disclosed herein e.g., encoding a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence of an N and/or C terminal deletion disclosed below as m-n of SEQ ID NO:2
  • m-n of SEQ ID NO:2 a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence of an N and/or C terminal deletion disclosed below as m-n of SEQ ID NO:2
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • nucleic acid molecules of the present invention that do not encode a polypeptide having FGF-10 functional activity include, inter alia, (1) isolating a FGF-10 gene or allelic or splice variants thereof in a cDNA library; (2) in situ hybridization (e.g., "FISH") to metaphase chromosomal spreads to provide precise chromosomal location of the FGF-10 gene, as described in Verma et al., Human Chromosomes: A Manual of Basic Techniques, Pergamon Press, New York (1988); and (3) Northern Blot analysis for detecting FGF-10 mRNA expression in specific tissues.
  • FISH in situ hybridization
  • a polypeptide having FGF-10 functional activity is intended polypeptides exhibiting activity similar, but not necessarily identical, to a functional activity of the FGF-10 polypeptides of the present invention (e.g., complete (full-length) FGF-10, mature FGF-10 and soluble FGF-10 (e.g., having sequences contained in the extracellular domain of FGF-10) as measured, for example, in a particular immunoassay or biological assay.
  • a FGF-10 functional activity can routinely be measured by determining the ability of a FGF-10 polypeptide to bind a FGF-10 ligand.
  • FGF-10 functional activity may also be measured by determining the ability of a polypeptide, such as cognate ligand which is free or expressed on a cell surface, to induce cells expressing the polypeptide.
  • nucleic acid molecules having a sequence at least 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, or 99% identical to the nucleic acid sequence of the deposited cDNA, the nucleic acid sequence shown in Figures 1A-B (SEQ ID NO: l), or fragments thereof, will encode polypeptides "having FGF-10 functional activity.”
  • degenerate variants of any of these nucleotide sequences all encode the same polypeptide, in many instances, this will be clear to the skilled artisan even without performing the above described comparison assay.
  • the first strategy exploits the tolerance of amino acid substitutions by natural selection during the process of evolution. By comparing amino acid sequences in different species, conserved amino acids can be identified. These conserved amino acids are likely important for protein function. In contrast, the amino acid positions where substitutions have been tolerated by natural selection indicates that these positions are not critical for protein function. Thus, positions tolerating amino acid substitution could be modified while still maintaining biological activity of the protein.
  • the second strategy uses genetic engineering to introduce amino acid changes at specific positions of a cloned gene to identify regions critical for protein function. For example, site directed mutagenesis or alanine-scanning mutagenesis (introduction of single alanine mutations at every residue in the molecule) can be used. (Cunningham and Wells, Science 244: 1081-1085 (1989).) The resulting mutant molecules can then be tested for biological activity.
  • tolerated conservative amino acid substitutions involve replacement of the aliphatic or hydrophobic amino acids Ala, Val, Leu and He; replacement of the hydroxyl residues Ser and Thr; replacement of the acidic residues Asp and Glu; replacement of the amide residues Asn and Gin, replacement of the basic residues Lys, Arg, and His; replacement of the aromatic residues Phe, Tyr, and Trp, and replacement of the small-sized amino acids Ala, Ser, Thr, Met, and Gly.
  • site directed changes at the amino acid level of FGF-10 can be made by replacing a particular amino acid with a conservative amino acid.
  • Preferred conservative mutations include: Ml replaced with A, G, I, L, S, T, or V; E2 replaced with D; S3 replaced with A, G, I, L, T, M, or V; K4 replaced with H, or R; E5 replaced with D; Q7 replaced with N; L8 replaced with A, G, I, S, T, M, or V; K9 replaced with H, or R; G10 replaced with A, I, L, S, T, M, or V; II 1 replaced with A, G, L, S, T, M, or V; V12 replaced with A, G, I, L, S, T, or M; T13 replaced with A, G, I, L, S, M, or V; R14 replaced with H, or K; L15 replaced with A, G, I, S, T, M, or V; F16 replaced with W, or Y; S17 replaced with A, G, I
  • the resulting constructs can be routinely screened for activities or functions described throughout the specification and known in the art.
  • the resulting constructs have an increased and/or a decreased FGF-10 activity or function, while the remaining FGF-10 activities or functions are maintained. More preferably, the resulting constructs have more than one increased and/or decreased FGF-10 activity or function, while the remaining FGF-10 activities or functions are maintained.
  • variants of FGF-10 include (i) substitutions with one or more of the non-conserved amino acid residues, where the substituted amino acid residues may or may not be one encoded by the genetic code, or (ii) substitution with one or more of amino acid residues having a substituent group, or (iii) fusion of the mature polypeptide with another compound, such as a compound to increase the stability and/or solubility of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol), or (iv) fusion of the polypeptide with additional amino acids, such as an IgG Fc fusion region peptide, or leader or secretory sequence, or a sequence facilitating purification.
  • Such variant polypeptides are deemed to be within the scope of those skilled in the art from the teachings herein.
  • FGF-10 polypeptide variants containing amino acid substitutions of charged amino acids with other charged or neutral amino acids may produce proteins with improved characteristics, such as less aggregation. Aggregation of pharmaceutical formulations both reduces activity and increases clearance due to the aggregate's immunogenic activity.
  • FGF-10 preferred non-conservative substitutions of FGF-10 include: Ml replaced with D, E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; E2 replaced with H, K, R, A, G, I, L, S, T, M, V, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; S3 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; K4 replaced with D, E, A, G, I, L, S, T, M, V, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; E5 replaced with H, K, R, A, G, I, L, S, T, M, V, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; P6 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, A, G, I, L, S, T, M, V, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; P6 replaced with D, E
  • E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C 147 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C;
  • P48 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, A, G, I, L, S, T, M, V, N, Q, F, W, Y, or C;
  • V49 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C;
  • G50 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C;
  • L51 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, N , Q, F, W, Y, P, or C;
  • R52 replaced with D, E, A, G, I, L, S, T, M, V, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C;
  • V53 replaced with D, E, H, K, R,
  • M122 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; K123 replaced with D, E, A, G, I, L, S, T, M, V, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; G124 replaced with D,
  • E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C N125 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, A, G, I, L, S, T, M, V, F, W, Y, P, or C; R126 replaced with D, E, A, G, I, L, S, T, M, V, N , Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; V127 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; K128 replaced with D, E, A, G, I, L, S, T, M, V, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; K129 replaced with D, E, A, G, I, L, S, T, M, V, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; T130 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; K131 replaced with D, E
  • E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C P168 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, A, G, I, L, S, T, M, V, N, Q, F, W, Y, or C; T169 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; M170 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; N171 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, A, G, I, L, S, T, M, V, F, W, Y, P, or C; G172 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; G173 replaced with D, E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C; K174 replaced with D, E, A, G, I, L, S, T, M,
  • F, W, Y, P, or C replaced with D, E, H, K, R, N, Q, F, W, Y, P, or C in the amino acid sequence of FGF-10 shown in SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the resulting constructs can be routinely screened for activities or functions described throughout the specification and known in the art.
  • the resulting constructs have an increased and/or decreased FGF-10 activity or function, while the remaining FGF-10 activities or functions are maintained. More preferably, the resulting constructs have more than one increased and/or decreased FGF-10 activity or function, while the remaining FGF-10 activities or functions are maintained.
  • more than one amino acid e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10
  • substituted amino acids can occur in the full length, mature, or proprotein form of FGF-10 protein, as well as the N- and C- terminal deletion mutants, having the general formula m-n, listed below.
  • a further embodiment of the invention relates to a polypeptide which comprises the amino acid sequence of a FGF-10 polypeptide having an amino acid sequence which contains at least one amino acid substitution, but not more than 50 amino acid substitutions, even more preferably, not more than 40 amino acid substitutions, still more preferably, not more than 30 amino acid substitutions, and still even more preferably, not more than 20 amino acid substitutions.
  • a peptide or polypeptide it is highly preferable for a peptide or polypeptide to have an amino acid sequence which comprises the amino acid sequence of a FGF- 10 polypeptide, which contains at least one, but not more than 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3 , 2 or 1 amino acid substitutions.
  • the number of additions, substitutions, and/or deletions in the amino acid sequence of Figures 1A-B or fragments thereof is 1-5, 5-10, 5-25, 5-50, 10-50 or 50-150, conservative amino acid substitutions are preferable.
  • the present invention is further directed to fragments of the isolated nucleic acid molecules described herein.
  • fragments have numerous uses that include, but are not limited to, diagnostic probes and primers as discussed herein.
  • larger fragments such as those of 501-1500 nt in length are also useful according to the present invention as are fragments corresponding to most, if not all, of the nucleotide sequences of the deposited cDNA (clone HAGAT55) or as shown in Figures 1A-B (SEQ ID NO:l).
  • a fragment at least 20 nt in length for example, is intended fragments which include 20 or more contiguous bases from, for example, the nucleotide sequence of the deposited cDNA, or the nucleotide sequence as shown in Figures 1A-B (SEQ ID NO:l).
  • FGF-10 polynucleotide fragments include, for example, fragments having a sequence from about nucleotide number 1- 50, 51-100, 101-150, 151-200, 201-250, 251-300, 301-350, 351-400, 401-450, 451-500, 501-550, 551-600, 651-700, 701-750, 751-800, 800-850, 851-900, 901- 950, 951-1000, 1001-1050, 1051-1100, 1101-1150, 1151-1200, 1201-1250, 1251- 1300, 1301-1350, 1351-1400, 1401-1450, 1451-1500, 1501-1550, 1551-1600, 1601-1650, 1651-1700, 1701-1750, 1751-1800, 1801-1850, 1851-1900, 1901- 1950, 1951-2000, and/or 2001 to the end of SEQ ID NO:l or the complementary strand thereto, or the cDNA contained in the deposited clon
  • the polynucleotide fragments of the invention encode a polypeptide which demonstrates a FGF-10 functional activity.
  • a polypeptide demonstrating a FGF-10 “functional activity” is meant, a polypeptide capable of displaying one or more known functional activities associated with a full-length (complete) FGF-10 protein.
  • Such functional activities include, but are not limited to, biological activity, antigenicity (ability to bind (or compete with a FGF-10 polypeptide for binding) to an anti-FGF-10 antibody), immunogenicity (ability to generate antibody which binds to a FGF-10 polypeptide), ability to form multimers with FGF-10 polypeptides of the invention, and ability to bind to a receptor or ligand for a FGF-10 polypeptide.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides and fragments, variants derivatives, and analogs thereof, can be assayed by various methods.
  • various immunoassay s known in the art can be used, including but not limited to, competitive and non-competitive assay systems using techniques such as radioimmunoassays, ELISA (enzyme linked immunosorbent assay), "sandwich” immunoassays, immunoradiometric assays, gel diffusion precipitation reactions, immunodiffusion assays, in situ immunoassays (using colloidal gold, enzyme or radioisotope labels, for example), western blots, precipitation reactions, agglutination assays (e.g., gel agglutination assays, hemagglutination assays), complement fixation assays, immunofluorescence assays, protein A assays, and immunoelectrophoresis assays, etc.
  • competitive and non-competitive assay systems using techniques such as radioimmunoassays, ELISA (enzyme linked immunosorbent assay), "sandwich” immunoassays, immunoradio
  • antibody binding is detected by detecting a label on the primary antibody.
  • the primary antibody is detected by detecting binding of a secondary antibody or reagent to the primary antibody.
  • the secondary antibody is labeled. Many means are known in the art for detecting binding in an immunoassay and are within the scope of the present invention.
  • binding can be assayed, e.g., by means well-known in the art, such as, for example, reducing and non-reducing gel chromatography, protein affinity chromatography, and affinity blotting. See generally, Phizicky, E., et al., 1995, Microbiol. Rev. 59:94-123.
  • physiological correlates of FGF- 10 binding to its substrates can be assayed.
  • assays described herein may routinely be applied to measure the ability of FGF-10 polypeptides and fragments, variants derivatives and analogs thereof to elicit FGF-10 related biological activity (either in vitro or in vivo).
  • Other methods will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention.
  • the present invention is further directed to fragments of the FGF-10 polypeptide described herein.
  • polypeptide sequence encoded by the deposited cDNA is intended to encompass polypeptide fragments contained in SEQ ID NO:2 or encoded by the cDNA contained in the deposited clone.
  • Protein fragments may be "free-standing,” or comprised within a larger polypeptide of which the fragment forms a part or region, most preferably as a single continuous region.
  • polypeptide fragments of the invention include, for example, fragments from about amino acid number 1-20, 21-40, 41-60, 61-80, 81-100, 102-120, 121-140, 141-160, 161-180, 181-200, 201-220, 221-240, 241- 260, 261-280, or 281 to the end of the coding region.
  • polypeptide fragments can be at least 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, or 150 amino acids in length.
  • “about” includes the particularly recited ranges, larger or smaller by several (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1) amino acids, at either extreme or at both extremes.
  • Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. Even if deletion of one or more amino acids from the N-terminus of a protein results in modification of loss of one or more biological functions of the protein, other functional activities (e.g., biological activities, ability to multimerize, ability to bind FGF-10 ligand) may still be retained. For example, the ability of shortened FGF-10 muteins to induce and/or bind to antibodies which recognize the complete or mature forms of the polypeptides generally will be retained when less than the majority of the residues of the complete or mature polypeptide are removed from the N-terminus.
  • other functional activities e.g., biological activities, ability to multimerize, ability to bind FGF-10 ligand
  • polypeptide fragments include the secreted FGF-10 protein as well as the mature form. Further preferred polypeptide fragments include the secreted FGF-10 protein or the mature form having a continuous series of deleted residues from the amino or the carboxy terminus, or both.
  • any number of amino acids can be deleted from the amino terminus of either the secreted FGF-10 polypeptide or the mature form.
  • any number of amino acids ranging from 1 -30, can be deleted from the carboxy terminus of the secreted FGF-10 protein or mature form.
  • any combination of the above amino and carboxy terminus deletions are preferred.
  • polynucleotide fragments encoding these FGF-10 polypeptide fragments are also preferred.
  • N-terminal deletions of the FGF-10 polypeptide can be described by the general formula n j -181, where n, is an integer from 2 to 180, where n, corresponds to the position of the amino acid residue identified in SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the invention provides polynucleotides encoding polypeptides comprising, or alternatively consisting of, the amino acid sequence of residues of: E- 2 to T-181; S-3 to T-181; K-4 to T-181; E-5 to T-181; P-6 to T-181; Q-7 to T-181; L- 8 to T-181; K-9 to T-181 ; G-10 to T-181; 1 11 to T-181; V-12 to T-181; T-13 to T- 181 ; R-14 to T-181; L-15 to T-181; F-16 to T-181; S-17 to T-181; Q-18 to T-181; Q- 19 to T-181; G-20 to T-181; Y-21 to T-181; F-22 to T-181; L-23 to T-181; Q-24 to T- 181; M-25 to T-181; H-26 to T-181; P-27 to T-181; D-28 to T-181; G-29 to T-181; T- 30 to T-18
  • interferon gamma shows up to ten times higher activities by deleting 8-10 amino acid residues from the carboxy terminus of the protein (Dobeli et al., J. Biotechnology 7:199-216 (1988).
  • the present invention further provides polypeptides having one or more residues deleted from the carboxy terminus of the amino acid sequence of the FGF-10 polypeptide shown in Figures 1A-B (SEQ ID NO:2), as described by the general formula 1- ⁇ i j , where m, is an integer from 2 to 180, where m, corresponds to the position of amino acid residue identified in SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the invention provides polynucleotides encoding polypeptides comprising, or alternatively consisting of, the amino acid sequence of residues of M- 1 to S-180; M-l to D-179; M-l to Q-178; M-l to N-177; M-l to V-176; M-l to V- 175; M-l to K-174; M-l to G-173; M-l to G-172; M-l to N-171; M-l to M-170; M- 1 to T-169; M-l to P-168; M-l to T-167; M-l to G-166; M-l to S-165; M-l to S- 164; M-l to K-163; M-l to R-162; M-l to S-161 ; M-l to R-160; M-l to G-159; M-l to Q-158; M-l to K-157; M-l to E-156; M-l to G-155; M-l to 1-
  • any of the above listed N- or C-terminal deletions can be combined to produce a N- and C-terminal deleted FGF-10 polypeptide.
  • the invention also provides polypeptides having one or more amino acids deleted from both the amino and the carboxyl termini, which may be described generally as having residues n r m j of SEQ ID NO:2, where n, and m, are integers as described above.
  • Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention.
  • nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide consisting of a portion of the complete FGF-10 amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA clone contained in ATCC Deposit No. 75696, where this portion excludes any integer of amino acid residues from 1 to about 171 amino acids from the amino terminus of the complete amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA clone contained in ATCC Deposit No. 75696, or any integer of amino acid residues from 1 to about 171 amino acids from the carboxy terminus, or any combination of the above amino terminal and carboxy terminal deletions, of the complete amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA clone contained in ATCC Deposit No. 75696.
  • Polynucleotides encoding all of the above deletion mutant polypeptide forms also are provided.
  • the present application is also directed to proteins containing polypeptides at least 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the FGF-10 polypeptide sequence set forth herein n r m v
  • the application is directed to proteins containing polypeptides at least 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of the specific FGF-10 N- and C-terminal deletions recited herein.
  • Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention.
  • Additional preferred polypeptide fragments comprise, or alternatively consist of, the amino acid sequence of residues: M-l to L-15; E-2 to F-16; S-3 to S-17; K-4 to Q-18; E-5 to Q-19; P-6 to G-20; Q-7 to Y-21; L-8 to F-22; K-9 to L-23; G-10 to Q- 24; 1 11 to M-25; V-12 to H-26; T-13 to P-27; R-14 to D-28; L-15 to G-29; F-16 to T-30; S-17 to 1-31 ; Q-18 to D-32; Q-19 to G-33; G-20 to T-34; Y-21 to K-35; F-22 to D-36; L-23 to E-37; Q-24 to N-38; M-25 to S-39; H-26 to D ⁇ IO; P-27 to Y-41; D-28 to T-42; G-29 to L-43; T-30 to F-44; 1-31 to N-45; D-32 to L-46; G-33 to 1-47;
  • polypeptide fragments may retain the biological activity of FGF-10 polypeptides of the invention and/or may be useful to generate or screen for antibodies, as described further below.
  • Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptide fragments are also encompassed by the invention.
  • the present application is also directed to nucleic acid molecules comprising, or alternatively, consisting of, a polynucleotide sequence at least 90%, 92%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, or 99% identical to the polynucleotide sequence encoding the FGF- 10 polypeptide described above.
  • the present invention also encompasses the above polynucleotide sequences fused to a heterologous polynucleotide sequence.
  • the present application is also directed to proteins containing polypeptides at least 90%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the FGF-10 polypeptide fragments set forth above.
  • Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention.
  • the polynucleotide fragments of the invention encode a polypeptide which demonstrates a FGF-10 functional activity.
  • a polypeptide demonstrating a FGF-10 "functional activity" is meant, a polypeptide capable of displaying one or more known functional activities associated with a full-length (complete) FGF-10 protein.
  • Such functional activities include, but are not limited to, biological activity, antigenicity [ability to bind (or compete with a FGF-10 polypeptide for binding) to an anti-FGF-10 antibody], immunogenicity (ability to generate antibody which binds to a FGF-10 polypeptide), ability to form multimers with FGF-10 polypeptides of the invention, and ability to bind to a receptor or ligand for a FGF-10 polypeptide.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides and fragments, variants derivatives, and analogs thereof, can be assayed by various methods.
  • various immunoassays known in the art can be used, including but not limited to, competitive and non-competitive assay systems using techniques such as radioimmunoassays, ELISA (enzyme linked immunosorbent assay), "sandwich” immunoassays, immunoradiometric assays, gel diffusion precipitation reactions, immunodiffusion assays, in situ immunoassays (using colloidal gold, enzyme or radioisotope labels, for example), western blots, precipitation reactions, agglutination assays (e.g., gel agglutination assays, hemagglutination assays), complement fixation assays, immunofluorescence assays, protein A assays, and immunoelectrophoresis assays, etc.
  • competitive and non-competitive assay systems using techniques such as radioimmunoassays, ELISA (enzyme linked immunosorbent assay), "sandwich” immunoassays, immunoradiometric
  • antibody binding is detected by detecting a label on the primary antibody.
  • the primary antibody is detected by detecting binding of a secondary antibody or reagent to the primary antibody.
  • the secondary antibody is labeled.
  • binding can be assayed, e.g., by means well-known in the art, such as, for example, reducing and non-reducing gel chromatography, protein affinity chromatography, and affinity blotting. See generally, Phizicky, E., et al., 1995, Microbiol. Rev. 59:94-123.
  • physiological correlates of FGF- 10 binding to its substrates can be assayed.
  • assays described herein may routinely be applied to measure the ability of FGF-10 polypeptides and fragments, variants derivatives and analogs thereof to elicit FGF-10 related biological activity (either in vitro or in vivo).
  • Other methods will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention.
  • fragments of the invention are fragments characterized by structural or functional attributes of FGF-10.
  • Such fragments include amino acid residues that comprise alpha-helix and alpha-helix forming regions ("alpha-regions"), beta-sheet and beta-sheet-forming regions ("beta-regions"), turn and turn-forming regions ("turn-regions”), coil and coil-forming regions ("coil- regions”), hydrophilic regions, hydrophobic regions, alpha amphipathic regions, beta amphipathic regions, surface forming regions, and high antigenic index regions (i.e., containing four or more contiguous amino acids having an antigenic index of greater than or equal to 1.5, as identified using the default parameters of the Jameson-Wolf program) of complete (i.e., full-length) FGF-10 (SEQ ID NO:2).
  • Certain preferred regions are those set out in Figure 3 and include, but are not limited to, regions of the aforementioned types identified by analysis of the amino acid sequence depicted in Figures 1A-B (SEQ ID NO:2), such preferred regions include; Garnier-Robson predicted alpha-regions, beta-regions, turn-regions, and coil-regions; Chou-Fasman predicted alpha-regions, beta-regions, turn-regions, and coil-regions; Kyte-Doolittle predicted hydrophilic and hydrophobic regions; Eisenberg alpha and beta amphipathic regions; Emini surface-forming regions; and Jameson-Wolf high antigenic index regions, as predicted using the default parameters of these computer programs. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention.
  • the polynucleotides of the invention encode functional attributes of FGF-10.
  • Preferred embodiments of the invention in this regard include fragments that comprise alpha-helix and alpha-helix forming regions ("alpha-regions"), beta-sheet and beta-sheet forming regions ("beta-regions"), turn and turn-forming regions ("turn-regions”), coil and coil-forming regions ("coil-regions”), hydrophilic regions, hydrophobic regions, alpha amphipathic regions, beta amphipathic regions, flexible regions, surface-forming regions and high antigenic index regions of FGF-10.
  • the data presented in columns VIII, IX, XIII, and XIV of Table I can be used to determine regions of FGF-10 which exhibit a high degree of potential for antigenicity. Regions of high antigenicity are determined from the data presented in columns VIII, IX, XIII, and/or IV by choosing values which represent regions of the polypeptide which are likely to be exposed on the surface of the polypeptide in an environment in which antigen recognition may occur in the process of initiation of an immune response.
  • Certain preferred regions in these regards are set out in Figure 3, but may, as shown in Table I, be represented or identified by using tabular representations of the data presented in Figure 3.
  • the DNA*STAR computer algorithm used to generate Figure 3 was used to present the data in Figure 3 in a tabular format (See Table I).
  • the tabular format of the data in Figure 3 may be used to easily determine specific boundaries of a preferred region.
  • the above-mentioned preferred regions set out in Figure 3 and in Table I include, but are not limited to, regions of the aforementioned types identified by analysis of the amino acid sequence set out in Figures 1A-B.
  • such preferred regions include Garnier-Robson alpha-regions, beta-regions, turn-regions, and coil-regions, Chou-Fasman alpha-regions, beta-regions, and coil-regions, Kyte-Doolittle hydrophilic regions and hydrophobic regions, Eisenberg alpha- and beta-amphipathic regions, Karplus-Schulz flexible regions, Emini surface-forming regions and Jameson- Wolf regions of high antigenic index.
  • Lys 84 A A 1 40 - 1 21 * F 0 90 1 28
  • fragments in this regard are those that comprise regions of FGF-10 that combine several structural features, such as several of the features set out above.
  • Biologically active fragments are those exhibiting activity similar, but not necessarily identical, to an activity of the FGF-10 polypeptide.
  • the biological activity of the fragments may include an improved desired activity, or a decreased undesirable activity.
  • polynucleotide sequences such as EST sequences
  • sequence databases Some of these sequences are related to SEQ ID NO:l and may have been publicly available prior to conception of the present invention.
  • polynucleotides are specifically excluded from the scope of the present invention. To list every related sequence would be cumbersome.
  • polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 1106 of SEQ ID NO:l, b is an integer of 15 to 1121, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO:l, and where the b is greater than or equal to a + 14.
  • the present invention encompasses polypeptides comprising, or alternatively consisting of, an epitope of the polypeptide having an amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:2, or an epitope of the polypeptide sequence encoded by a polynucleotide sequence contained in ATCC Deposit No: 75696 or encoded by a polynucleotide that hybridizes to the complement of the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or contained in ATCC Deposit No: 75696 under stringent hybridization conditions or lower stringency hybridization conditions as defined supra.
  • the present invention further encompasses polynucleotide sequences encoding an epitope of a polypeptide sequence of the invention (such as, for example, the sequence disclosed in SEQ ID NO: l), polynucleotide sequences of the complementary strand of a polynucleotide sequence encoding an epitope of the invention, and polynucleotide sequences which hybridize to the complementary strand under stringent hybridization conditions or lower stringency hybridization conditions defined supra.
  • epitope of a polypeptide sequence of the invention such as, for example, the sequence disclosed in SEQ ID NO: l
  • polynucleotide sequences of the complementary strand of a polynucleotide sequence encoding an epitope of the invention and polynucleotide sequences which hybridize to the complementary strand under stringent hybridization conditions or lower stringency hybridization conditions defined supra.
  • epitope of a polypeptide sequence of the invention such as, for example, the sequence disclosed in SEQ ID NO
  • the present invention encompasses a polypeptide comprising an epitope, as well as the polynucleotide encoding this polypeptide.
  • An "immunogenic epitope,” as used herein, is defined as a portion of a protein that elicits an antibody response in an animal, as determined by any method known in the art, for example, by the methods for generating antibodies described infra. (See, for example, Geysen et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81:3998- 4002 (1983)).
  • antigenic epitope is defined as a portion of a protein to which an antibody can immunospecifically bind its antigen as determined by any method well known in the art, for example, by the immunoassays described herein. Immunospecific binding excludes non-specific binding but does not necessarily exclude cross- reactivity with other antigens. Antigenic epitopes need not necessarily be immunogenic. Fragments which function as epitopes may be produced by any conventional means. (See, e.g., Houghten, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:5131-5135 (1985), further described in U.S. Patent No. 4,631,211).
  • antigenic epitopes preferably contain a sequence of at least 4, at least 5, at least 6, at least 7, more preferably at least 8, at least 9, at least 10, at least 11 , at least 12, at least 13, at least 14, at least 15, at least 20, at least 25, at least 30, at least 40, at least 50, and, most preferably, between about 15 to about 30 amino acids.
  • Preferred polypeptides comprising immunogenic or antigenic epitopes are at least 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, or 100 amino acid residues in length.
  • Additional non-exclusive preferred antigenic epitopes include the antigenic epitopes disclosed herein, as well as portions thereof.
  • Antigenic epitopes are useful, for example, to raise antibodies, including monoclonal antibodies, that specifically bind the epitope.
  • Preferred antigenic epitopes include the antigenic epitopes disclosed herein, as well as any combination of two, three, four, five or more of these antigenic epitopes.
  • Antigenic epitopes can be used as the target molecules in immunoassays. (See, for instance, Wilson et al., Cell 37:767-778 (1984); Sutcliffe et al., Science 219:660-666 (1983)).
  • immunogenic epitopes can be used, for example, to induce antibodies according to methods well known in the art. (See, for instance, Sutcliffe et al., supra; Wilson et al., supra; Chow et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:910-914; and Bittie et al., J. Gen. Virol. 66:2347-2354 (1985).
  • Preferred immunogenic epitopes include the immunogenic epitopes disclosed herein, as well as any combination of two, three, four, five or more of these immunogenic epitopes.
  • the polypeptides comprising one or more immunogenic epitopes may be presented for eliciting an antibody response together with a carrier protein, such as an albumin, to an animal system (such as rabbit or mouse), or, if the polypeptide is of sufficient length (at least about 25 amino acids), the polypeptide may be presented without a carrier.
  • a carrier protein such as an albumin
  • immunogenic epitopes comprising as few as 8 to 10 amino acids have been shown to be sufficient to raise antibodies capable of binding to, at the very least, linear epitopes in a denatured polypeptide (e.g., in Western blotting).
  • Epitope-bearing polypeptides of the present invention may be used to induce antibodies according to methods well known in the art including, but not limited to, in vivo immunization, in vitro immunization, and phage display methods. See, e.g., Sutcliffe et al., supra; Wilson et al., supra, and Bittie et al., J. Gen. Virol., 66:2347- 2354 (1985).
  • animals may be immunized with free peptide; however, anti-peptide antibody titer may be boosted by coupling the peptide to a macromolecular carrier, such as keyhole limpet hemacyanin (KLH) or tetanus toxoid.
  • KLH keyhole limpet hemacyanin
  • peptides containing cysteine residues may be coupled to a carrier using a linker such as maleimidobenzoyl- N-hydroxysuccinimide ester (MBS), while other peptides may be coupled to carriers using a more general linking agent such as glutaraldehyde.
  • Animals such as rabbits, rats and mice are immunized with either free or carrier- coupled peptides, for instance, by intraperitoneal and/or intradermal injection of emulsions containing about 100 ⁇ g of peptide or carrier protein and Freund's adjuvant or any other adjuvant known for stimulating an immune response.
  • booster injections may be needed, for instance, at intervals of about two weeks, to provide a useful titer of anti-peptide antibody which can be detected, for example, by ELISA assay using free peptide adsorbed to a solid surface.
  • the titer of anti-peptide antibodies in serum from an immunized animal may be increased by selection of anti-peptide antibodies, for instance, by adsorption to the peptide on a solid support and elution of the selected antibodies according to methods well known in the art.
  • the polypeptides of the present invention comprising an immunogenic or antigenic epitope can be fused to other polypeptide sequences.
  • the polypeptides of the present invention may be fused with the constant domain of immunoglobulins (IgA, IgE, IgG, IgM), or portions thereof (CHI, CH2, CH3, or any combination thereof and portions thereof) resulting in chimeric polypeptides.
  • Such fusion proteins may facilitate purification and may increase half-life in vivo. This has been shown for chimeric proteins consisting of the first two domains of the human CD4-polypeptide and various domains of the constant regions of the heavy or light chains of mammalian immunoglobulins. See, e.g., EP 394,827; Traunecker et al., Nature, 331:84-86 (1988). Enhanced delivery of an antigen across the epithelial barrier to the immune system has been demonstrated for antigens (e.g., insulin) conjugated to an FcRn binding partner such as IgG or Fc fragments (see, e.g., PCT Publications WO 96/22024 and WO 99/04813).
  • antigens e.g., insulin
  • FcRn binding partner such as IgG or Fc fragments
  • IgG Fusion proteins that have a disulfide-linked dimeric structure due to the IgG portion desulfide bonds have also been found to be more efficient in binding and neutralizing other molecules than monomeric polypeptides or fragments thereof alone. See, e.g., Fountoulakis et al., J. Biochem., 270:3958-3964 (1995). Nucleic acids encoding the above epitopes can also be recombined with a gene of interest as an epitope tag (e.g., the hemagglutinin ("HA”) tag or flag tag) to aid in detection and purification of the expressed polypeptide.
  • an epitope tag e.g., the hemagglutinin ("HA") tag or flag tag
  • DNA shuffling may be employed to modulate the activities of polypeptides of the invention, such methods can be used to generate polypeptides with altered activity, as well as agonists and antagonists of the polypeptides. See, generally, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,605,793; 5,811,238; 5,830,721 ; 5,834,252; and 5,837,458, and Patten et al., Curr. Opinion Biotechnol.
  • alteration of polynucleotides corresponding to SEQ ID NO: 1 and the polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides may be achieved by DNA shuffling.
  • DNA shuffling involves the assembly of two or more DNA segments by homologous or site-specific recombination to generate variation in the polynucleotide sequence.
  • polynucleotides of the invention may be altered by being subjected to random mutagenesis by error-prone PCR, random nucleotide insertion or other methods prior to recombination.
  • one or more components, motifs, sections, parts, domains, fragments, etc., of a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide of the invention may be recombined with one or more components, motifs, sections, parts, domains, fragments, etc. of one or more heterologous molecules.
  • TCR T-cell antigen receptors
  • Antibodies of the invention include, but are not limited to, polyclonal, monoclonal, multispecific, human, humanized or chimeric antibodies, single chain antibodies, Fab fragments, F(ab') fragments, fragments produced by a Fab expression library, anti-idiotypic (anti-Id) antibodies (including, e.g., anti-Id antibodies to antibodies of the invention), and epitope-binding fragments of any of the above.
  • antibody refers to immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e., molecules that contain an antigen binding site that immunospecifically binds an antigen.
  • the immunoglobulin molecules of the invention can be of any type (e.g., IgG, IgE, IgM, IgD, IgA and IgY), class (e.g., IgGl, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgAl and IgA2) or subclass of immunoglobulin molecule.
  • the antibodies are human antigen-binding antibody fragments of the present invention and include, but are not limited to, Fab, Fab' and F(ab')2, Fd, single-chain Fvs (scFv), single-chain antibodies, disulfide-linked Fvs (sdFv) and fragments comprising either a VL or VH domain.
  • Antigen-binding antibody fragments may comprise the variable region(s) alone or in combination with the entirety or a portion of the following: hinge region, CHI, CH2, and CH3 domains. Also included in the invention are antigen-binding fragments also comprising any combination of variable region(s) with a hinge region, CHI, CH2, and CH3 domains.
  • the antibodies of the invention may be from any animal origin including birds and mammals. Preferably, the antibodies are human, murine (e.g., mouse and rat), donkey, ship rabbit, goat, guinea pig, camel, horse, or chicken.
  • human antibodies include antibodies having the amino acid sequence of a human immunoglobulin and include antibodies isolated from human immunoglobulin libraries or from animals transgenic for one or more human immunoglobulin and that do not express endogenous immunoglobulins, as described infra and, for example in, U.S. Patent No. 5,939,598 by Kucherlapati et al.
  • the antibodies of the present invention may be monospecific, bispecific, trispecific or of greater multispecificity. Multispecific antibodies may be specific for different epitopes of a polypeptide of the present invention or may be specific for both a polypeptide of the present invention as well as for a heterologous epitope, such as a heterologous polypeptide or solid support material.
  • Antibodies of the present invention may be described or specified in terms of the epitope(s) or portion(s) of a polypeptide of the present invention which they recognize or specifically bind.
  • the epitope(s) or polypeptide portion(s) may be specified as described herein, e.g., by N-terminal and C-terminal positions, by size in contiguous amino acid residues, or listed in the Tables and Figures.
  • Preferred epitopes of the invention include: from about Met-1 to about Gln-7, from about Ile-31 to about Asp-40, from about Thr- 100 to about Arg- 109, from about Asn- 125 to about His-135, and from about Lys-157 to about Gly-166 of SEQ ID NO:2, as well as polynucleotides that encode these epitopes.
  • Antibodies which specifically bind any epitope or polypeptide of the present invention may also be excluded. Therefore, the present invention includes antibodies that specifically bind polypeptides of the present invention, and allows for the exclusion of the same. Antibodies of the present invention may also be described or specified in terms of their cross-reactivity.
  • Antibodies that do not bind any other analog, ortholog, or homolog of a polypeptide of the present invention are included.
  • Antibodies that bind polypeptides with at least 95%, at least 90%, at least 85%, at least 80%, at least 75%, at least 70%, at least 65%, at least 60%, at least 55%, and at least 50% identity (as calculated using methods known in the art and described herein) to a polypeptide of the present invention are also included in the present invention.
  • antibodies of the present invention cross-react with murine, rat and/or rabbit homologs of human proteins and the corresponding epitopes thereof.
  • Antibodies that do not bind polypeptides with less than 95%, less than 90%, less than 85%, less than 80%, less than 75%, less than 70%, less than 65%, less than 60%, less than 55%, and less than 50% identity (as calculated using methods known in the art and described herein) to a polypeptide of the present invention are also included in the present invention.
  • the above-described cross-reactivity is with respect to any single specific antigenic or immunogenic polypeptide, or combination(s) of 2, 3, 4, 5, or more of the specific antigenic and/or immunogenic polypeptides disclosed herein.
  • antibodies which bind polypeptides encoded by polynucleotides which hybridize to a polynucleotide of the present invention under stringent hybridization conditions are also included in the present invention.
  • Preferred binding affinities include those with a dissociation constant or Kd less than 5 X IO "2 M, IO “2 M, 5 X IO “3 M, IO '3 M, 5 X IO “4 M, 10 "4 M, 5 X IO “5 M, IO 5 M, 5 X 10° M, 10 6 M, 5 X IO "7 M, IO 7 M, 5 X IO "8 M, IO "8 M, 5 X IO "9 M, 10° M, 5 X 10 10 M, 10 " 10 M, 5 X 10 11 M, 10 11 M, 5 X IO 12 M, 10 12 M, 5 X 10 13 M, IO 13 M, 5 X 10 14 M, 10 14 M, 5 X IO 15 M, or 10 ,5 M.
  • the invention also provides antibodies that competitively inhibit binding of an antibody to an epitope of the invention as determined by any method known in the art for determining competitive binding, for example, the immunoassays described herein.
  • the antibody competitively inhibits binding to the epitope by at least 95%, at least 90%, at least 85 %, at least 80%, at least 75%, at least 70%, at least 60%, or at least 50%.
  • Antibodies of the present invention may act as agonists or antagonists of the polypeptides of the present invention.
  • the present invention includes antibodies which disrupt the receptor/ligand interactions with the polypeptides of the invention either partially or fully.
  • antibodies of the present invention bind an antigenic epitope disclosed herein, or a portion thereof.
  • the invention features both receptor-specific antibodies and ligand-specific antibodies.
  • the invention also features receptor-specific antibodies which do not prevent ligand binding but prevent receptor activation. Receptor activation (i.e., signaling) may be determined by techniques described herein or otherwise known in the art.
  • receptor activation can be determined by detecting the phosphorylation (e.g., tyrosine or serine/threonine) of the receptor or its substrate by immunoprecipitation followed by western blot analysis (for example, as described supra).
  • antibodies are provided that inhibit ligand activity or receptor activity by at least 95%, at least 90%, at least 85%, at least 80%, at least 75%, at least 70%, at least 60%, or at least 50% of the activity in absence of the antibody.
  • the invention also features receptor-specific antibodies which both prevent ligand binding and receptor activation as well as antibodies that recognize the receptor- ligand complex, and, preferably, do not specifically recognize the unbound receptor or the unbound ligand.
  • neutralizing antibodies which bind the ligand and prevent binding of the ligand to the receptor as well as antibodies which bind the ligand, thereby preventing receptor activation, but do not prevent the ligand from binding the receptor.
  • antibodies which activate the receptor may act as receptor agonists, i.e., potentiate or activate either all or a subset of the biological activities of the ligand- mediated receptor activation, for example, by inducing dimerization of the receptor.
  • the antibodies may be specified as agonists, antagonists or inverse agonists for biological activities comprising the specific biological activities of the peptides of the invention disclosed herein.
  • the above antibody agonists can be made using methods known in the art.
  • Antibodies of the present invention may be used, for example, but not limited to, to purify, detect, and target the polypeptides of the present invention, including both in vitro and in vivo diagnostic and therapeutic methods.
  • the antibodies have use in immunoassays for qualitatively and quantitatively measuring levels of the polypeptides of the present invention in biological samples. See, e.g., Harlow et al., Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2nd ed. 1988) (incorporated by reference herein in its entirety).
  • the antibodies of the present invention may be used either alone or in combination with other compositions.
  • the antibodies may further be recombinantly fused to a heterologous polypeptide at the N- or C-terminus or chemically conjugated (including covalently and non-covalently conjugations) to polypeptides or other compositions.
  • antibodies of the present invention may be recombinantly fused or conjugated to molecules useful as labels in detection assays and effector molecules such as heterologous polypeptides, drugs, radionuclides, or toxins. See, e.g., PCT publications WO 92/08495; WO 91/14438; WO 89/12624; U.S. Patent No. 5,314,995; and EP 396,387.
  • the antibodies of the invention include derivatives that are modified, i.e, by the covalent attachment of any type of molecule to the antibody such that covalent attachment does not prevent the antibody from generating an anti-idiotypic response.
  • the antibody derivatives include antibodies that have been modified, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, pegylation, phosphylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to a cellular ligand or other protein, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications may be carried out by known techniques, including, but not limited to specific chemical cleavage, acetylation, formylation, metabolic synthesis of tunicamycin, etc.
  • the derivative may contain one or more non-classical amino acids.
  • the antibodies of the present invention may be generated by any suitable method known in the art. Polyclonal antibodies to an antigen-of- interest can be produced by various procedures well known in the art. For example, a polypeptide of the invention can be administered to various host animals including, but not limited to, rabbits, mice, rats, etc. to induce the production of sera containing polyclonal antibodies specific for the antigen.
  • adjuvants may be used to increase the immunological response, depending on the host species, and include but are not limited to, Freund's (complete and incomplete), mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanins, dinitrophenol, and potentially useful human adjuvants such as BCG (bacille Calmette-Guerin) and corynebacterium parvum. Such adjuvants are also well known in the art.
  • Monoclonal antibodies can be prepared using a wide variety of techniques known in the art including the use of hybridoma, recombinant, and phage display technologies, or a combination thereof.
  • monoclonal antibodies can be produced using hybridoma techniques including those known in the art and taught, for example, in Harlow et al., Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2nd ed. 1988); Hammerling, et al., in: Monoclonal Antibodies and T-Cell Hybridomas 563-681 (Elsevier, N.Y., 1981) (said references incorporated by reference in their entireties).
  • mice can be immunized with a polypeptide of the invention or a cell expressing such peptide.
  • the mouse spleen is harvested and splenocytes isolated.
  • the splenocytes are then fused by well known techniques to any suitable myeloma cells, for example cells from cell line SP20 available from the ATCC.
  • Hybridomas are selected and cloned by limited dilution.
  • the hybridoma clones are then assayed by methods known in the art for cells that secrete antibodies capable of binding a polypeptide of the invention. Ascites fluid, which generally contains high levels of antibodies, can be generated by immunizing mice with positive hybridoma clones.
  • the present invention provides methods of generating monoclonal antibodies as well as antibodies produced by the method comprising culturing a hybridoma cell secreting an antibody of the invention wherein, preferably, the hybridoma is generated by fusing splenocytes isolated from a mouse immunized with an antigen of the invention with myeloma cells and then screening the hybridomas resulting from the fusion for hybridoma clones that secrete an antibody able to bind a polypeptide of the invention.
  • Antibody fragments which recognize specific epitopes may be generated by known techniques.
  • Fab and F(ab')2 fragments of the invention may be produced by proteolytic cleavage of immunoglobulin molecules, using enzymes such as papain (to produce Fab fragments) or pepsin (to produce F(ab')2 fragments).
  • F(ab')2 fragments contain the variable region, the light chain constant region and the CHI domain of the heavy chain.
  • the antibodies of the present invention can also be generated using various phage display methods known in the art.
  • phage display methods functional antibody domains are displayed on the surface of phage particles which carry the polynucleotide sequences encoding them.
  • phage can be utilized to display antigen binding domains expressed from a repertoire or combinatorial antibody library (e.g., human or murine).
  • Phage expressing an antigen binding domain that binds the antigen of interest can be selected or identified with antigen, e.g., using labeled antigen or antigen bound or captured to a solid surface or bead.
  • Phage used in these methods are typically filamentous phage including fd and M13 binding domains expressed from phage with Fab, Fv or disulfide stabilized Fv antibody domains recombinantly fused to either the phage gene III or gene VIII protein.
  • Examples of phage display methods that can be used to make the antibodies of the present invention include those disclosed in Brinkman et al., J . Immunol. Methods 182:41-50 (1995); Ames et al., J. Immunol. Methods 184: 177- 186 (1995); Kettleborough et al., Eur. J. Immunol.
  • the antibody coding regions from the phage can be isolated and used to generate whole antibodies, including human antibodies, or any other desired antigen binding fragment, and expressed in any desired host, including mammalian cells, insect cells, plant cells, yeast, and bacteria, e.g., as described in detail below.
  • a chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions of the antibody are derived from different animal species, such as antibodies having a variable region derived from a murine monoclonal antibody and a human immunoglobulin constant region.
  • Methods for producing chimeric antibodies are known in the art. See e.g., Morrison, Science 229:1202 (1985); Oi et al., BioTechniques 4:214 (1986); Gillies et al., (1989) J. Immunol. Methods 125:191-202; U.S. Patent Nos. 5,807,715; 4,816,567; and 4,816397, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
  • Humanized antibodies are antibody molecules from non-human species antibody that binds the desired antigen having one or more complementarity determining regions (CDRs) from the non-human species and a framework regions from a human immunoglobulin molecule.
  • CDRs complementarity determining regions
  • framework residues in the human framework regions will be substituted with the corresponding residue from the CDR donor antibody to alter, preferably improve, antigen binding.
  • These framework substitutions are identified by methods well known in the art, e.g., by modeling of the interactions of the CDR and framework residues to identify framework residues important for antigen binding and sequence comparison to identify unusual framework residues at particular positions. (See, e.g., Queen et al., U.S. Patent No.
  • Antibodies can be humanized using a variety of techniques known in the art including, for example, CDR-grafting (EP 239,400; PCT publication WO 91/09967; U.S. Patent Nos. 5,225,539; 5,530,101 ; and 5,585,089), veneering or resurfacing (EP 592,106; EP 519,596; Padlan, Molecular Immunology 28(4/5):489-498 (1991); Studnicka et al., Protein Engineering 7(6):805-814 (1994); Roguska. et al., PNAS 91:969-973 (1994)), and chain shuffling (U.S. Patent No. 5,565,332).
  • Human antibodies are particularly desirable for therapeutic treatment of human patients.
  • Human antibodies can be made by a variety of methods known in the art including phage display methods described above using antibody libraries derived from human immunoglobulin sequences. See also, U.S. Patent Nos. 4,444,887 and 4,716,111; and PCT publications WO 98/46645, WO 98/50433, WO 98/24893, WO 98/16654, WO 96/34096, WO 96/33735, and WO 91/10741; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Human antibodies can also be produced using transgenic mice which are incapable of expressing functional endogenous immunoglobulins, but which can express human immunoglobulin genes.
  • the human heavy and light chain immunoglobulin gene complexes may be introduced randomly or by homologous recombination into mouse embryonic stem cells.
  • the human variable region, constant region, and diversity region may be introduced into mouse embryonic stem cells in addition to the human heavy and light chain genes.
  • the mouse heavy and light chain immunoglobulin genes may be rendered nonfunctional separately or simultaneously with the introduction of human immunoglobulin loci by homologous recombination.
  • homozygous deletion of the JH region prevents endogenous antibody production.
  • the modified embryonic stem cells are expanded and microinjected into blastocysts to produce chimeric mice. The chimeric mice are then bred to produce homozygous offspring which express human antibodies.
  • the transgenic mice are immunized in the normal fashion with a selected antigen, e.g., all or a portion of a polypeptide of the invention.
  • Monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen can be obtained from the immunized, transgenic mice using conventional hybridoma technology.
  • the human immunoglobulin transgenes harbored by the transgenic mice rearrange during B cell differentiation, and subsequently undergo class switching and somatic mutation.
  • this technology for producing human antibodies see Lonberg and Huszar, Int. Rev. Immunol. 13:65-93 (1995).
  • antibodies which bind to and competitively inhibit polypeptide multimerization and/or binding of a polypeptide of the invention to a ligand can be used to generate anti-idiotypes that "mimic" the polypeptide multimerization and/or binding domain and, as a consequence, bind to and neutralize polypeptide and/or its ligand.
  • anti-idiotypes or Fab fragments of such anti-idiotypes can be used in therapeutic regimens to neutralize polypeptide ligand.
  • anti-idiotypic antibodies can be used to bind a polypeptide of the invention and/or to bind its ligands/receptors, and thereby block its biological activity.
  • the invention further provides polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence encoding an antibody of the invention and fragments thereof.
  • the invention also encompasses polynucleotides that hybridize under stringent or lower stringency hybridization conditions, e.g., as defined supra, to polynucleotides that encode an antibody, preferably, that specifically binds to a polypeptide of the invention, preferably, an antibody that binds to a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the polynucleotides may be obtained, and the nucleotide sequence of the polynucleotides determined, by any method known in the art.
  • a polynucleotide encoding the antibody may be assembled from chemically synthesized oligonucleotides (e.g., as described in Kutmeier et al., BioTechniques 17:242 (1994)), which, briefly, involves the synthesis of overlapping oligonucleotides containing portions of the sequence encoding the antibody, annealing and ligating of those oligonucleotides, and then amplification of the ligated oligonucleotides by PCR.
  • chemically synthesized oligonucleotides e.g., as described in Kutmeier et al., BioTechniques 17:242 (1994)
  • a polynucleotide encoding an antibody may be generated from nucleic acid from a suitable source. If a clone containing a nucleic acid encoding a particular antibody is not available, but the sequence of the antibody molecule is known, a nucleic acid encoding the immunoglobulin may be chemically synthesized or obtained from a suitable source (e.g., an antibody cDNA library, or a cDNA library generated from, or nucleic acid, preferably poly A+ RNA, isolated from, any tissue or cells expressing the antibody, such as hybridoma cells selected to express an antibody of the invention) by PCR amplification using synthetic primers hybridizable to the 3' and 5' ends of the sequence or by cloning using an oligonucleotide probe specific for the particular gene sequence to identify, e.g., a cDNA clone from a cDNA library that encodes the antibody.
  • a suitable source e.g., an antibody cDNA
  • Amplified nucleic acids generated by PCR may then be cloned into replicable cloning vectors using any method well known in the art.
  • the nucleotide sequence and corresponding amino acid sequence of the antibody may be manipulated using methods well known in the art for the manipulation of nucleotide sequences, e.g., recombinant DNA techniques, site directed mutagenesis, PCR, etc.
  • the amino acid sequence of the heavy and/or light chain variable domains may be inspected to identify the sequences of the complementarity determining regions (CDRs) by methods that are well know in the art, e.g., by comparison to known amino acid sequences of other heavy and light chain variable regions to determine the regions of sequence hypervariability.
  • CDRs complementarity determining regions
  • one or more of the CDRs may be inserted within framework regions, e.g., into human framework regions to humanize a non- human antibody, as described supra.
  • the framework regions may be naturally occurring or consensus framework regions, and preferably human framework regions (see, e.g., Chothia et al., J. Mol. Biol.
  • the polynucleotide generated by the combination of the framework regions and CDRs encodes an antibody that specifically binds a polypeptide of the invention.
  • one or more amino acid substitutions may be made within the framework regions, and, preferably, the amino acid substitutions improve binding of the antibody to its antigen. Additionally, such methods may be used to make amino acid substitutions or deletions of one or more variable region cysteine residues participating in an intrachain disulfide bond to generate antibody molecules lacking one or more intrachain disulfide bonds.
  • Other alterations to the polynucleotide are encompassed by the present invention and within the skill of the art.
  • a chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions are derived from different animal species, such as those having a variable region derived from a murine mAb and a human immunoglobulin constant region, e.g., humanized antibodies.
  • Single chain antibodies are formed by linking the heavy and light chain fragments of the Fv region via an amino acid bridge, resulting in a single chain polypeptide.
  • Techniques for the assembly of functional Fv fragments in E. coli may also be used (Skerra et al., Science 242: 1038- 1041 (1988)).
  • the antibodies of the invention can be produced by any method known in the art for the synthesis of antibodies, in particular, by chemical synthesis or preferably, by recombinant expression techniques.
  • Recombinant expression of an antibody of the invention, or fragment, derivative or analog thereof, e.g., a heavy or light chain of an antibody of the invention or a single chain antibody of the invention
  • an expression vector containing a polynucleotide that encodes the antibody requires construction of an expression vector containing a polynucleotide that encodes the antibody.
  • the vector for the production of the antibody molecule may be produced by recombinant DNA technology using techniques well known in the art.
  • Such vectors may include the nucleotide sequence encoding the constant region of the antibody molecule (see, e.g., PCT Publication WO 86/05807; PCT Publication WO 89/01036; and U.S. Patent No. 5,122,464) and the variable domain of the antibody may be cloned into such a vector for expression of the entire heavy or light chain.
  • the expression vector is transferred to a host cell by conventional techniques and the transfected cells are then cultured by conventional techniques to produce an antibody of the invention.
  • the invention includes host cells containing a polynucleotide encoding an antibody of the invention, or a heavy or light chain thereof, or a single chain antibody of the invention, operably linked to a heterologous promoter.
  • vectors encoding both the heavy and light chains may be co-expressed in the host cell for expression of the entire immunoglobulin molecule, as detailed below.
  • host-expression vector systems may be utilized to express the antibody molecules of the invention.
  • Such host-expression systems represent vehicles by which the coding sequences of interest may be produced and subsequently purified, but also represent cells which may, when transformed or transfected with the appropriate nucleotide coding sequences, express an antibody molecule of the invention in situ.
  • These include but are not limited to microorganisms such as bacteria (e.g., E. coli, B.
  • subtilis transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA, plasmid DNA or cosmid DNA expression vectors containing antibody coding sequences; yeast (e.g., Saccharomyces, Pichia) transformed with recombinant yeast expression vectors containing antibody coding sequences; insect cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus) containing antibody coding sequences; plant cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or transformed with recombinant plasmid expression vectors (e.g., Ti plasmid) containing antibody coding sequences; or mammalian cell systems (e.g., COS, CHO, BHK, 293, 3T3 cells) harboring recombinant expression constructs containing promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells (e.g., metal lothionein promoter) or from mamm
  • bacterial cells such as Escherichia coli, and more preferably, eukaryotic cells, especially for the expression of whole recombinant antibody molecule, are used for the expression of a recombinant antibody molecule.
  • mammalian cells such as Chinese hamster ovary cells (CHO), in conjunction with a vector such as the major intermediate early gene promoter element from human cytomegalovirus is an effective expression system for antibodies (Foecking et al., Gene 45:101 (1986); Cockett et al., Bio/Technology 8:2 (1990)).
  • a number of expression vectors may be advantageously selected depending upon the use intended for the antibody molecule being expressed.
  • vectors which direct the expression of high levels of fusion protein products that are readily purified may be desirable.
  • Such vectors include, but are not limited, to the E. coli expression vector pUR278 (Ruther et al., EMBO J. 2:1791 (1983)), in which the antibody coding sequence may be ligated individually into the vector in frame with the lac Z coding region so that a fusion protein is produced; pIN vectors (Inouye & Inouye, Nucleic Acids Res.
  • pGEX vectors may also be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST).
  • GST glutathione S-transferase
  • fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption and binding to matrix glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione.
  • the pGEX vectors are designed to include thrombin or factor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned target gene product can be released from the GST moiety.
  • AcNPV is used as a vector to express foreign genes.
  • the virus grows in Spodoptera frugiperda cells.
  • the antibody coding sequence may be cloned individually into non-essential regions (for example the polyhedrin gene) of the virus and placed under control of an AcNPV promoter (for example the polyhedrin promoter).
  • a number of viral-based expression systems may be utilized.
  • the antibody coding sequence of interest may be ligated to an adenovirus transcription/translation control complex, e.g., the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence.
  • This chimeric gene may then be inserted in the adenovirus genome by in vitro or in vivo recombination. Insertion in a non- essential region of the viral genome (e.g., region El or E3) will result in a recombinant virus that is viable and capable of expressing the antibody molecule in infected hosts, (e.g., see Logan & Shenk, Proc. Natl. Acad.
  • Specific initiation signals may also be required for efficient translation of inserted antibody coding sequences. These signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. Furthermore, the initiation codon must be in phase with the reading frame of the desired coding sequence to ensure translation of the entire insert. These exogenous translational control signals and initiation codons can be of a variety of origins, both natural and synthetic. The efficiency of expression may be enhanced by the inclusion of appropriate transcription enhancer elements, transcription terminators, etc. (see Bittner et al., Methods in Enzymol. 153:51-544 (1987)).
  • a host cell strain may be chosen which modulates the expression of the inserted sequences, or modifies and processes the gene product in the specific fashion desired. Such modifications (e.g., glycosylation) and processing (e.g., cleavage) of protein products may be important for the function of the protein.
  • Different host cells have characteristic and specific mechanisms for the post- translational processing and modification of proteins and gene products. Appropriate cell lines or host systems can be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein expressed.
  • eukaryotic host cells which possess the cellular machinery for proper processing of the primary transcript, glycosylation, and phosphorylation of the gene product may be used.
  • Such mammalian host cells include but are not limited to CHO, VERY, BHK, Hela, COS, MDCK, 293, 3T3, WI38, and in particular, breast cancer cell lines such as, for example, BT483, Hs578T, HTB2, BT20 and T47D, and normal mammary gland cell line such as, for example, CRL7030 and Hs578Bst.
  • cell lines which stably express the antibody molecule may be engineered.
  • host cells can be transformed with DNA controlled by appropriate expression control elements (e.g., promoter, enhancer, sequences, transcription terminators, polyadenylation sites, etc.), and a selectable marker.
  • appropriate expression control elements e.g., promoter, enhancer, sequences, transcription terminators, polyadenylation sites, etc.
  • engineered cells may be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched media, and then are switched to a selective media.
  • the selectable marker in the recombinant plasmid confers resistance to the selection and allows cells to stably integrate the plasmid into their chromosomes and grow to form foci which in turn can be cloned and expanded into cell lines.
  • This method may advantageously be used to engineer cell lines which express the antibody molecule.
  • Such engineered cell lines may be particularly useful in screening and evaluation of compounds that interact directly or indirectly with the antibody molecule.
  • a number of selection systems may be used, including but not limited to the herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler et al., Cell 11:223 (1977)), hypoxanthine-guanine phosphoribosyltransferase (Szybalska & Szybalski, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 48:202 (1992)), and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase (Lowy et al., Cell 22:817 (1980)) genes can be employed in tk-, hgprt- or aprt- cells, respectively.
  • antimetabolite resistance can be used as the basis of selection for the following genes: dhfr, which confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et al., Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:357 (1980); O'Hare et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 78:1527 (1981)); gpt, which confers resistance to mycophenolic acid (Mulligan & Berg, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • the expression levels of an antibody molecule can be increased by vector amplification (for a review, see Bebbington and Hentschel, The use of vectors based on gene amplification for the expression of cloned genes in mammalian cells in DNA cloning, Vol.3. (Academic Press, New York, 1987)).
  • vector amplification for a review, see Bebbington and Hentschel, The use of vectors based on gene amplification for the expression of cloned genes in mammalian cells in DNA cloning, Vol.3. (Academic Press, New York, 1987)).
  • a marker in the vector system expressing antibody is amplifiable
  • increase in the level of inhibitor present in culture of host cell will increase the number of copies of the marker gene. Since the amplified region is associated with the antibody gene, production of the antibody will also increase (Crouse et al., Mol. Cell. Biol. 3:257 (1983)).
  • the host cell may be co-transfected with two expression vectors of the invention, the first vector encoding a heavy chain derived polypeptide and the second vector encoding a light chain derived polypeptide.
  • the two vectors may contain identical selectable markers which enable equal expression of heavy and light chain polypeptides.
  • a single vector may be used which encodes, and is capable of expressing, both heavy and light chain polypeptides. In such situations, the light chain should be placed before the heavy chain to avoid an excess of toxic free heavy chain (Proudfoot, Nature 322:52 (1986); Kohler, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:2197 (1980)).
  • the coding sequences for the heavy and light chains may comprise cDNA or genomic DNA.
  • an antibody molecule of the invention may be purified by any method known in the art for purification of an immunoglobulin molecule, for example, by chromatography (e.g., ion exchange, affinity, particularly by affinity for the specific antigen after Protein A, and sizing column chromatography), centnfugation, differential solubility, or by any other standard technique for the purification of proteins.
  • chromatography e.g., ion exchange, affinity, particularly by affinity for the specific antigen after Protein A, and sizing column chromatography
  • centnfugation e.g., centnfugation, differential solubility, or by any other standard technique for the purification of proteins.
  • the antibodies of the present invention or fragments thereof can be fused to heterologous polypeptide sequences described herein or otherwise known in the art, to facilitate purification.
  • the present invention encompasses antibodies recombinantly fused or chemically conjugated (including both covalently and non-covalently conjugations) to a polypeptide (or portion thereof, preferably at least 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 or 100 amino acids of the polypeptide) of the present invention to generate fusion proteins.
  • the fusion does not necessarily need to be direct, but may occur through linker sequences.
  • the antibodies may be specific for antigens other than polypeptides (or portion thereof, preferably at least 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 or 100 amino acids of the polypeptide) of the present invention.
  • antibodies may be used to target the polypeptides of the present invention to particular cell types, either in vitro or in vivo, by fusing or conjugating the polypeptides of the present invention to antibodies specific for particular cell surface receptors.
  • Antibodies fused or conjugated to the polypeptides of the present invention may also be used in in vitro immunoassays and purification methods using methods known in the art. See e.g., Harbor et al., supra, and PCT publication WO 93/21232; EP 439,095; Naramura et al., Immunol. Lett. 39:91-99 (1994); U.S.
  • the present invention further includes compositions comprising the polypeptides of the present invention fused or conjugated to antibody domains other than the variable regions.
  • the polypeptides of the present invention may be fused or conjugated to an antibody Fc region, or portion thereof.
  • the antibody portion fused to a polypeptide of the present invention may comprise the constant region, hinge region, CHI domain, CH2 domain, and CH3 domain or any combination of whole domains or portions thereof.
  • polypeptides may also be fused or conjugated to the above antibody portions to form multimers.
  • Fc portions fused to the polypeptides of the present invention can form dimers through disulfide bonding between the Fc portions.
  • Higher multimeric forms can be made by fusing the polypeptides to portions of IgA and IgM. Methods for fusing or conjugating the polypeptides of the present invention to antibody portions are known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos.
  • polypeptides corresponding to a polypeptide, polypeptide fragment, or a variant of SEQ ID NO:2 may be fused or conjugated to the above antibody portions to increase the in vivo half life of the polypeptides or for use in immunoassays using methods known in the art. Further, the polypeptides corresponding to SEQ ID NO:2 may be fused or conjugated to the above antibody portions to facilitate purification.
  • One reported example describes chimeric proteins consisting of the first two domains of the human CD4-polypeptide and various domains of the constant regions of the heavy or light chains of mammalian immunoglobulins. (EP 394,827; Traunecker et al., Nature 331:84-86 (1988).
  • polypeptides of the present invention fused or conjugated to an antibody having disulfide- linked dimeric structures may also be more efficient in binding and neutralizing other molecules, than the monomeric secreted protein or protein fragment alone.
  • the Fc part in a fusion protein is beneficial in therapy and diagnosis, and thus can result in, for example, improved pharmacokinetic properties.
  • EP A 232,262 Alternatively, deleting the Fc part after the fusion protein has been expressed, detected, and purified, would be desired.
  • the Fc portion may hinder therapy and diagnosis if the fusion protein is used as an antigen for immunizations.
  • human proteins such as hIL-5
  • Fc portions for the purpose of high-throughput screening assays to identify antagonists of hIL-5.
  • the antibodies or fragments thereof of the present invention can be fused to marker sequences, such as a peptide to facilitate purification.
  • the marker amino acid sequence is a hexa-histidine peptide, such as the tag provided in a pQE vector (QIAGEN, Inc., 9259 Eton Avenue, Chatsworth, CA, 91311), among others, many of which are commercially available.
  • a pQE vector QIAGEN, Inc., 9259 Eton Avenue, Chatsworth, CA, 91311
  • hexa- histidine provides for convenient purification of the fusion protein.
  • peptide tags useful for purification include, but are not limited to, the "HA” tag, which corresponds to an epitope derived from the influenza hemagglutinin protein (Wilson et al., Cell 37:767 (1984)) and the "flag" tag.
  • the present invention further encompasses antibodies or fragments thereof conjugated to a diagnostic or therapeutic agent.
  • the antibodies can be used diagnostically to, for example, monitor the development or progression of a tumor as part of a clinical testing procedure to, e.g., determine the efficacy of a given treatment regimen. Detection can be facilitated by coupling the antibody to a detectable substance.
  • detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, radioactive materials, positron emitting metals using various positron emission tomographies, and nonradioactive paramagnetic metal ions.
  • the detectable substance may be coupled or conjugated either directly to the antibody (or fragment thereof) or indirectly, through an intermediate (such as, for example, a linker known in the art) using techniques known in the art. See, for example, U.S. Patent No. 4,741,900 for metal ions which can be conjugated to antibodies for use as diagnostics according to the present invention.
  • suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, beta-galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase;
  • suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin;
  • suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin;
  • an example of a luminescent material includes luminol;
  • examples of bioluminescent materials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin;
  • suitable radioactive material include 1251, 1311, 1 l lln or 99Tc.
  • an antibody or fragment thereof may be conjugated to a therapeutic moiety such as a cytotoxin, e.g., a cytostatic or cytocidal agent, a therapeutic agent or a radioactive metal ion, e.g., alpha-emitters such as, for example, 213Bi.
  • a cytotoxin or cytotoxic agent includes any agent that is detrimental to cells.
  • Examples include paclitaxol, cytochalasin B, gramicidin D, ethidium bromide, emetine, mitomycin, etoposide, tenoposide, vincristine, vinblastine, colchicin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, dihydroxy anthracin dione, mitoxantrone, mithramycin, actinomycin D, 1- dehydrotestosterone, glucocorticoids, procaine, tetracaine, lidocaine, propranolol, and puromycin and analogs or homologs thereof.
  • Therapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, antimetabolites (e.g., methotrexate, 6-mercaptopurine, 6-thioguanine, cytarabine, 5-fluorouracil decarbazine), alkylating agents (e.g., mechlorethamine, thioepa chlorambucil, melphalan, carmustine (BSNU) and lomustine (CCNU), cyclothosphamide, busulfan, dibromomannitol, streptozotocin, mitomycin C, and cis- dichlorodiamine platinum (II) (DDP) cisplatin), anthracyclines (e.g., daunorubicin (formerly daunomycin) and doxorubicin), antibiotics (e.g., dactinomycin (formerly actinomycin), bleomycin, mithramycin, and anthramycin (AMC)), and anti-mitotic agents (e.g.,
  • the conjugates of the invention can be used for modifying a given biological response, the therapeutic agent or drug moiety is not to be construed as limited to classical chemical therapeutic agents.
  • the drug moiety may be a protein or polypeptide possessing a desired biological activity.
  • proteins may include, for example, a toxin such as abrin, ricin A, pseudomonas exotoxin, or diphtheria toxin; a protein such as tumor necrosis factor, a-interferon, ⁇ -interferon, nerve growth factor, platelet derived growth factor, tissue plasminogen activator, an apoptotic agent, e.g., TNF-alpha, TNF-beta, AIM I (See, International Publication No.
  • a thrombotic agent or an anti- angiogenic agent e.g., angiostatin or endostatin
  • biological response modifiers such as, for example, lymphokines, interleukin-1 ("IL-1"), interleukin-2 (“IL-2”), interleukin-6 (“IL-6”), granulocyte macrophage colony stimulating factor (“GM-CSF”), granulocyte colony stimulating factor (“G-CSF”), or other growth factors.
  • IL-1 interleukin-1
  • IL-2 interleukin-2
  • IL-6 interleukin-6
  • GM-CSF granulocyte macrophage colony stimulating factor
  • G-CSF granulocyte colony stimulating factor
  • Antibodies may also be attached to solid supports, which are particularly useful for immunoassays or purification of the target antigen.
  • solid supports include, but are not limited to, glass, cellulose, polyacrylamide, nylon, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride or polypropylene.
  • Techniques for conjugating such therapeutic moiety to antibodies are well known, see, e.g., Arnon et al., "Monoclonal Antibodies For Immunotargeting Of Drugs In Cancer Therapy", in Monoclonal Antibodies And Cancer Therapy, Reisfeld et al. (eds.), pp. 243-56 (Alan R. Liss, Inc.
  • an antibody can be conjugated to a second antibody to form an antibody heteroconjugate as described by Segal in U.S. Patent No. 4,676,980, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • An antibody, with or without a therapeutic moiety conjugated to it, administered alone or in combination with cytotoxic factor(s) and/or cytokine(s) can be used as a therapeutic.
  • the antibodies of the invention may be utilized for immunophenotyping of cell lines and biological samples.
  • the translation product of the gene of the present invention may be useful as a cell specific marker, or more specifically as a cellular marker that is differentially expressed at various stages of differentiation and/or maturation of particular cell types.
  • Monoclonal antibodies directed against a specific epitope, or combination of epitopes will allow for the screening of cellular populations expressing the marker.
  • Various techniques can be utilized using monoclonal antibodies to screen for cellular populations expressing the marker(s), and include magnetic separation using antibody-coated magnetic beads, "panning" with antibody attached to a solid matrix (i.e., plate), and flow cytometry (See, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,985,660; and Morrison et al, Cell, 96:131-49 (1999)).
  • hematological malignancies i.e. minimal residual disease (MRD) in acute leukemic patients
  • MRD minimal residual disease
  • GVHD Graft-versus-Host Disease
  • these techniques allow for the screening of hematopoietic stem and progenitor cells capable of undergoing proliferation and/or differentiation, as might be found in human umbilical cord blood.
  • the antibodies of the invention may be assayed for immunospecific binding by any method known in the art.
  • the immunoassays which can be used include but are not limited to competitive and non-competitive assay systems using techniques such as western blots, radioimmunoassays, ELISA (enzyme linked immunosorbent assay), "sandwich” immunoassays, immunoprecipitation assays, precipitin reactions, gel diffusion precipitin reactions, immunodiffusion assays, agglutination assays, complement-fixation assays, immunoradiometric assays, fluorescent immunoassays, protein A immunoassays, to name but a few.
  • Immunoprecipitation protocols generally comprise lysing a population of cells in a lysis buffer such as RIPA buffer (1% NP-40 or Triton X- 100, 1% sodium deoxycholate, 0.1% SDS, 0.15 M NaCI, 0.01 M sodium phosphate at pH 7.2, 1 % Trasylol) supplemented with protein phosphatase and/or protease inhibitors (e.g., EDTA, PMSF, aprotinin, sodium vanadate), adding the antibody of interest to the cell lysate, incubating for a period of time (e.g., 1-4 hours) at 4° C, adding protein A and/or protein G sepharose beads to the cell lysate, incubating for about an hour or more at 4° C, washing the beads in lysis buffer and resuspending the beads in SDS/sample buffer.
  • a lysis buffer such as RIPA buffer (1% NP-40 or Triton X- 100, 1% sodium deoxy
  • the ability of the antibody of interest to immunoprecipitate a particular antigen can be assessed by, e.g., western blot analysis.
  • One of skill in the art would be knowledgeable as to the parameters that can be modified to increase the binding of the antibody to an antigen and decrease the background (e.g., pre-clearing the cell lysate with sepharose beads).
  • immunoprecipitation protocols see, e.g., Ausubel et al, eds, 1994, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. 1, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York at 10.16.1.
  • Western blot analysis generally comprises preparing protein samples, electrophoresis of the protein samples in a polyacrylamide gel (e.g., 8%- 20% SDS- PAGE depending on the molecular weight of the antigen), transferring the protein sample from the polyacrylamide gel to a membrane such as nitrocellulose, PVDF or nylon, blocking the membrane in blocking solution (e.g., PBS with 3% BSA or nonfat milk), washing the membrane in washing buffer (e.g., PBS-Tween 20), blocking the membrane with primary antibody (the antibody of interest) diluted in blocking buffer, washing the membrane in washing buffer, blocking the membrane with a secondary antibody (which recognizes the primary antibody, e.g., an anti-human antibody) conjugated to an enzymatic substrate (e.g., horseradish peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase) or radioactive molecule (e.g., 32P or 1251) diluted in blocking buffer, washing the membrane in wash buffer, and detecting the presence of the antigen.
  • ELISAs comprise preparing antigen, coating the well of a 96 well microtiter plate with the antigen, adding the antibody of interest conjugated to a detectable compound such as an enzymatic substrate (e.g., horseradish peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase) to the well and incubating for a period of time, and detecting the presence of the antigen.
  • a detectable compound such as an enzymatic substrate (e.g., horseradish peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase)
  • a detectable compound such as an enzymatic substrate (e.g., horseradish peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase)
  • a second antibody conjugated to a detectable compound may be added following the addition of the antigen of interest to the coated well.
  • ELISAs see, e.g., Ausubel et al, eds, 1994, Cu ⁇ ent Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. 1, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York at 1 1.2.1.
  • the binding affinity of an antibody to an antigen and the off-rate of an antibody-antigen interaction can be determined by competitive binding assays.
  • a competitive binding assay is a radioimmunoassay comprising the incubation of labeled antigen (e.g., 3H or 1251) with the antibody of interest in the presence of increasing amounts of unlabeled antigen, and the detection of the antibody bound to the labeled antigen.
  • the affinity of the antibody of interest for a particular antigen and the binding off-rates can be determined from the data by scatchard plot analysis. Competition with a second antibody can also be determined using radioimmunoassays.
  • the antigen is incubated with antibody of interest conjugated to a labeled compound (e.g., 3H or 1251) in the presence of increasing amounts of an unlabeled second antibody.
  • Therapeutic Uses is further directed to antibody-based therapies which involve administering antibodies of the invention to an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably a human, patient for treating and/or preventing one or more of the disclosed diseases, disorders, or conditions.
  • Therapeutic compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to, antibodies of the invention (including fragments, analogs and derivatives thereof as described herein) and nucleic acids encoding antibodies of the invention (including fragments, analogs and derivatives thereof and anti-idiotypic antibodies as described herein).
  • the antibodies of the invention can be used to treat, inhibit and/or prevent diseases, disorders or conditions associated with aberrant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention, including, but not limited to, any one or more of the diseases, disorders, or conditions described herein.
  • the treatment and/or prevention of diseases, disorders, or conditions associated with abe ⁇ ant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention includes, but is not limited to, alleviating symptoms associated with those diseases, disorders or conditions.
  • Antibodies of the invention may be provided in pharmaceutically acceptable compositions as known in the art or as described herein.
  • a summary of the ways in which the antibodies of the present invention may be used therapeutically includes binding polynucleotides or polypeptides of the present invention locally or systemically in the body or by direct cytotoxicity of the antibody, e.g. as mediated by complement (CDC) or by effector cells (ADCC). Some of these approaches are described in more detail below.
  • the antibodies of this invention may be advantageously utilized in combination with other monoclonal or chimeric antibodies, or with lymphokines or hematopoietic growth factors (such as, e.g., IL-2, IL-3 and 1L-7), for example, which serve to increase the number or activity of effector cells which interact with the antibodies.
  • lymphokines or hematopoietic growth factors such as, e.g., IL-2, IL-3 and 1L-7
  • the antibodies of the invention may be administered alone or in combination with other types of treatments (e.g., radiation therapy, chemotherapy, hormonal therapy, immunotherapy and anti-tumor agents). Generally, administration of products of a species origin or species reactivity (in the case of antibodies) that is the same species as that of the patient is preferred. Thus, in a prefe ⁇ ed embodiment, human antibodies, fragments derivatives, analogs, or nucleic acids, are administered to a human patient for therapy or prophylaxis.
  • polypeptides or polynucleotides of the present invention It is preferred to use high affinity and/or potent in vivo inhibiting and/or neutralizing antibodies against polypeptides or polynucleotides of the present invention, fragments or regions thereof, for both immunoassays directed to and therapy of disorders related to polynucleotides or polypeptides, including fragments thereof, of the present invention.
  • Such antibodies, fragments, or regions will preferably have an affinity for polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention, including fragments thereof.
  • Preferred binding affinities include those with a dissociation constant or Kd less than 5 X IO "2 M, IO “2 M, 5 X IO “3 M, IO “3 M, 5 X 10 " 4 M, 10 "4 M, 5 X IO 5 M, IO “5 M, 5 X 10° M, IO "6 M, 5 X IO “7 M, IO “7 M, 5 X 10 8 M, IO “8 M, 5 X 10 ° M, 10 ° M, 5 X IO "10 M, IO 10 M, 5 X 10 " M, IO 11 M, 5 X IO "12 M, IO “12 M, 5 X IO “13 M, 10 " 13 M, 5 X IO 14 M, IO 14 M, 5 X IO 15 M, and IO "15 M.
  • nucleic acids comprising sequences encoding antibodies or functional derivatives thereof, are administered to treat, inhibit and/or prevent a disease or disorder associated with abe ⁇ ant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention, by way of gene therapy.
  • Gene therapy refers to therapy performed by the administration to a subject of an expressed or expressible nucleic acid.
  • the nucleic acids produce their encoded protein that mediates a therapeutic effect.
  • the compound comprises nucleic acid sequences encoding an antibody, said nucleic acid sequences being part of expression vectors that express the antibody or fragments or chimeric proteins or heavy or light chains thereof in a suitable host.
  • nucleic acid sequences have promoters operably linked to the antibody coding region, said promoter being inducible or constitutive, and, optionally, tissue- specific.
  • nucleic acid molecules are used in which the antibody coding sequences and any other desired sequences are flanked by regions that promote homologous recombination at a desired site in the genome, thus providing for intrachromosomal expression of the antibody encoding nucleic acids (Koller and Smithies, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935 (1989); Zijlstra et al., Nature 342:435-438 (1989).
  • the expressed antibody molecule is a single chain antibody; alternatively, the nucleic acid sequences include sequences encoding both the heavy and light chains, or fragments thereof, of the antibody.
  • Delivery of the nucleic acids into a patient may be either direct, in which case the patient is directly exposed to the nucleic acid or nucleic acid- carrying vectors, or indirect, in which case, cells are first transformed with the nucleic acids in vitro, then transplanted into the patient. These two approaches are known, respectively, as in vivo or ex vivo gene therapy.
  • the nucleic acid sequences are directly administered in vivo, where it is expressed to produce the encoded product.
  • This can be accomplished by any of numerous methods known in the art, e.g., by constructing them as part of an appropriate nucleic acid expression vector and administering it so that they become intracellular, e.g., by infection using defective or attenuated retrovirals or other viral vectors (see U.S. Patent No.
  • microparticle bombardment e.g., a gene gun; Biolistic, Dupont
  • coating lipids or cell-surface receptors or transfecting agents, encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, or microcapsules, or by administering them in linkage to a peptide which is known to enter the nucleus, by administering it in linkage to a ligand subject to receptor-mediated endocytosis (see, e.g., Wu and Wu, J. Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432 (1987)) (which can be used to target cell types specifically expressing the receptors), etc.
  • nucleic acid-ligand complexes can be formed in which the ligand comprises a fusogenic viral peptide to disrupt endosomes, allowing the nucleic acid to avoid lysosomal degradation.
  • the nucleic acid can be targeted in vivo for cell specific uptake and expression, by targeting a specific receptor (see, e.g., PCT Publications WO 92/06180; WO 92/22635; WO92/20316; WO93/14188, WO 93/20221).
  • the nucleic acid can be introduced intracellularly and incorporated within host cell DNA for expression, by homologous recombination (Koller and Smithies, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • viral vectors that contains nucleic acid sequences encoding an antibody of the invention are used.
  • a retroviral vector can be used (see Miller et al., Meth. Enzymol. 217:581-599 (1993)). These retroviral vectors contain the components necessary for the conect packaging of the viral genome and integration into the host cell DNA.
  • the nucleic acid sequences encoding the antibody to be used in gene therapy are cloned into one or more vectors, which facilitates delivery of the gene into a patient.
  • retroviral vectors More detail about retroviral vectors can be found in Boesen et al., Biotherapy 6:291-302 (1994), which describes the use of a retroviral vector to deliver the mdrl gene to hematopoietic stem cells in order to make the stem cells more resistant to chemotherapy.
  • Other references illustrating the use of retroviral vectors in gene therapy are: Clowes et al., J. Clin. Invest. 93:644-651 (1994); Kiem et al., Blood 83:1467-1473 (1994); Salmons and Gunzberg, Human Gene Therapy 4: 129-141 (1993); and Grossman and Wilson, Curr. Opin. in Genetics and Devel. 3: 110-114 (1993).
  • Adenoviruses are other viral vectors that can be used in gene therapy. Adenoviruses are especially attractive vehicles for delivering genes to respiratory epithelia. Adenoviruses naturally infect respiratory epithelia where they cause a mild disease. Other targets for adenovirus-based delivery systems are liver, the central nervous system, endothelial cells, and muscle. Adenoviruses have the advantage of being capable of infecting non-dividing cells. Kozarsky and Wilson, Current Opinion in Genetics and Development 3:499-503 (1993) present a review of adenovirus-based gene therapy.
  • adenovirus vectors are used.
  • Adeno-associated virus has also been proposed for use in gene therapy (Walsh et al., Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 204:289-300 (1993); U.S. Patent No. 5,436,146).
  • Another approach to gene therapy involves transfe ⁇ ing a gene to cells in tissue culture by such methods as electroporation, lipofection, calcium phosphate mediated transfection, or viral infection.
  • the method of transfer includes the transfer of a selectable marker to the cells. The cells are then placed under selection to isolate those cells that have taken up and are expressing the transferred gene. Those cells are then delivered to a patient.
  • the nucleic acid is introduced into a cell prior to administration in vivo of the resulting recombinant cell.
  • introduction can be carried out by any method known in the art, including but not limited to transfection, electroporation, microinjection, infection with a viral or bacteriophage vector containing the nucleic acid sequences, cell fusion, chromosome-mediated gene transfer, microcell-mediated gene transfer, spheroplast fusion, etc.
  • Numerous techniques are known in the art for the introduction of foreign genes into cells (see, e.g., Loeffler and Behr, Meth. Enzymol. 217:599-618 (1993); Cohen et al., Meth. Enzymol.
  • the technique should provide for the stable transfer of the nucleic acid to the cell, so that the nucleic acid is expressible by the cell and preferably heritable and expressible by its cell progeny.
  • Recombinant blood cells e.g., hematopoietic stem or progenitor cells
  • Recombinant blood cells are preferably administered intravenously.
  • the amount of cells envisioned for use depends on the desired effect, patient state, etc., and can be determined by one skilled in the art.
  • Cells into which a nucleic acid can be introduced for purposes of gene therapy encompass any desired, available cell type, and include but are not limited to epithelial cells, endothelial cells, keratinocytes, fibroblasts, muscle cells, hepatocytes; blood cells such as Tlymphocytes, Blymphocytes, monocytes, macrophages, neutrophils, eosinophils, megakary ocytes, granulocytes; various stem or progenitor cells, in particular hematopoietic stem or progenitor cells, e.g., as obtained from bone ma ⁇ ow, umbilical cord blood, peripheral blood, fetal liver, etc.
  • the cell used for gene therapy is autologous to the patient.
  • nucleic acid sequences encoding an antibody are introduced into the cells such that they are expressible by the cells or their progeny, and the recombinant cells are then administered in vivo for therapeutic effect.
  • stem or progenitor cells are used. Any stem and/or progenitor cells which can be isolated and maintained in vitro can potentially be used in accordance with this embodiment of the present invention (see e.g. PCT Publication WO 94/08598; Stemple and Anderson, Cell 71:973-985 (1992); Rheinwald, Meth. Cell Bio. 21A:229 (1980); and Pittelkow and Scott, Mayo Clinic Proc. 61:771 (1986)).
  • the nucleic acid to be introduced for purposes of gene therapy comprises an inducible promoter operably linked to the coding region, such that expression of the nucleic acid is controllable by controlling the presence or absence of the appropriate inducer of transcription. Demonstration of Therapeutic or Prophylactic Activity
  • the compounds or pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are preferably tested in vitro, and then in vivo for the desired therapeutic or prophylactic activity, prior to use in humans.
  • in vitro assays to demonstrate the therapeutic or prophylactic utility of a compound or pharmaceutical composition include, the effect of a compound on a cell line or a patient tissue sample.
  • the effect of the compound or composition on the cell line and/or tissue sample can be determined utilizing techniques known to those of skill in the art including, but not limited to, rosette formation assays and cell lysis assays.
  • in vitro assays which can be used to determine whether administration of a specific compound is indicated, include in vitro cell culture assays in which a patient tissue sample is grown in culture, and exposed to or otherwise administered a compound, and the effect of such compound upon the tissue sample is observed.
  • the invention provides methods of treatment and/or preventing, inhibition and prophylaxis by administration to a subject of an effective amount of a compound or pharmaceutical composition of the invention, preferably an antibody of the invention.
  • the compound is substantially purified (e.g., substantially free from substances that limit its effect or produce undesired side- effects).
  • the subject is preferably an animal, including but not limited o animals such as cows, pigs, horses, chickens, cats, dogs, etc., and is preferably a mammal, and most preferably human.
  • Formulations and methods of administration that can be employed when the compound comprises a nucleic acid or an immunoglobulin are described above; additional appropriate formulations and routes of administration can be selected from among those described herein below.
  • a compound of the invention e.g., encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, microcapsules, recombinant cells capable of expressing the compound, receptor- mediated endocytosis (see, e.g., Wu and Wu, J. Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432 (1987)), construction of a nucleic acid as part of a retroviral or other vector, etc.
  • Methods of introduction include but are not limited to intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, epidural, and oral routes.
  • the compounds or compositions may be administered by any convenient route, for example by infusion or bolus injection, by absorption through epithelial or mucocutaneous linings (e.g., oral mucosa, rectal and intestinal mucosa, etc.) and may be administered together with other biologically active agents. Administration can be systemic or local.
  • Pulmonary administration can also be employed, e.g., by use of an inhaler or nebulizer, and formulation with an aerosolizing agent.
  • a protein, including an antibody, of the invention care must be taken to use materials to which the protein does not absorb.
  • the compound or composition can be delivered in a vesicle, in particular a liposome (see Langer, Science 249:1527-1533 (1990); Treat et al., in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 353- 365 (1989); Lopez-Berestein, ibid., pp. 317-327; see generally ibid.)
  • the compound or composition can be delivered in a controlled release system.
  • a pump may be used (see Langer, supra; Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref. Biomed. Eng. 14:201 (1987); Buchwald et al., Surgery 88:507 (1980); Saudek et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 321:574 (1989)).
  • polymeric materials can be used (see Medical Applications of Controlled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Florida (1974); Controlled Drug Bioavailability, Drug Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, J., Macromol. Sci. Rev. Macromol. Chem. 23:61 (1983); see also Levy et al., Science 228:190 (1985); During et al., Ann. Neurol. 25:351 (1989); Howard et al., J.Neurosurg. 71: 105 (1989)).
  • a controlled release system can be placed in proximity of the therapeutic target, i.e., the brain, thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115-138 (1984)).
  • the nucleic acid can be administered in vivo to promote expression of its encoded protein, by constructing it as part of an appropriate nucleic acid expression vector and administering it so that it becomes intracellular, e.g., by use of a retroviral vector (see U.S. Patent No.
  • a nucleic acid can be introduced intracellularly and incorporated within host cell DNA for expression, by homologous recombination.
  • compositions comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable means approved by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals, and more particularly in humans.
  • carrier refers to a diluent, adjuvant, excipient, or vehicle with which the therapeutic is administered.
  • Such pharmaceutical carriers can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like.
  • Water is a prefe ⁇ ed canier when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously.
  • Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions.
  • Suitable pharmaceutical excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like.
  • the composition if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents.
  • compositions can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsion, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-release formulations and the like.
  • the composition can be formulated as a suppository, with traditional binders and carriers such as triglycerides.
  • Oral formulation can include standard caniers such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc. Examples of suitable pharmaceutical caniers are described in "Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences" by E.W. Martin.
  • Such compositions will contain a therapeutically effective amount of the compound, preferably in purified form, together with a suitable amount of carrier so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient.
  • the formulation should suit the mode of administration.
  • the composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures as a pharmaceutical composition adapted for intravenous administration to human beings.
  • compositions for intravenous administration are solutions in sterile isotonic aqueous buffer.
  • the composition may also include a solubilizing agent and a local anesthetic such as lignocaine to ease pain at the site of the injection.
  • the ingredients are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent.
  • composition is to be administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline.
  • an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior to administration.
  • the compounds of the invention can be formulated as neutral or salt forms.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those formed with anions such as those derived from hydrochloric, phosphoric, acetic, oxalic, tartaric acids, etc., and those formed with cations such as those derived from sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, fenic hydroxides, isopropylamine, triethylamine, 2-ethylamino ethanol, histidine, procaine, etc.
  • the amount of the compound of the invention which will be effective in the treatment, inhibition and/or prevention of a disease or disorder associated with aberrant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention can be determined by standard clinical techniques.
  • in vitro assays may optionally be employed to help identify optimal dosage ranges.
  • the precise dose to be employed in the formulation will also depend on the route of administration, and the seriousness of the disease or disorder, and should be decided according to the judgment of the practitioner and each patient's circumstances. Effective doses may be extrapolated from dose-response curves derived from in vitro or animal model test systems.
  • the dosage administered to a patient is typically 0.1 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg of the patient's body weight.
  • the dosage administered to a patient is between 0.1 mg/kg and 20 mg/kg of the patient's body weight, more preferably 1 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg of the patient's body weight.
  • human antibodies have a longer half-life within the human body than antibodies from other species due to the immune response to the foreign polypeptides. Thus, lower dosages of human antibodies and less frequent administration is often possible.
  • the dosage and frequency of administration of antibodies of the invention may be reduced by enhancing uptake and tissue penetration (e.g., into the brain) of the antibodies by modifications such as, for example, lipidation.
  • the invention also provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention.
  • a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention.
  • Optionally associated with such container(s) can be a notice in the form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale of pharmaceuticals or biological products, which notice reflects approval by the agency of manufacture, use or sale for human administration.
  • Labeled antibodies, and derivatives and analogs thereof, which specifically bind to a polypeptide of interest can be used for diagnostic purposes to detect, diagnose, or monitor diseases, disorders, and/or conditions associated with the abenant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention.
  • the invention provides for the detection of abenant expression of a polypeptide of interest, comprising (a) assaying the expression of the polypeptide of interest in cells or body fluid of an individual using one or more antibodies specific to the polypeptide interest and (b) comparing the level of gene expression with a standard gene expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the assayed polypeptide gene expression level compared to the standard expression level is indicative of aberrant expression.
  • the invention provides a diagnostic assay for diagnosing a disorder, comprising (a) assaying the expression of the polypeptide of interest in cells or body fluid of an individual using one or more antibodies specific to the polypeptide interest and (b) comparing the level of gene expression with a standard gene expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the assayed polypeptide gene expression level compared to the standard expression level is indicative of a particular disorder.
  • a diagnostic assay for diagnosing a disorder comprising (a) assaying the expression of the polypeptide of interest in cells or body fluid of an individual using one or more antibodies specific to the polypeptide interest and (b) comparing the level of gene expression with a standard gene expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the assayed polypeptide gene expression level compared to the standard expression level is indicative of a particular disorder.
  • the presence of a relatively high amount of transcript in biopsied tissue from an individual may indicate a predisposition for the development of the disease, or may provide a means for detecting the disease prior
  • Antibodies of the invention can be used to assay protein levels in a biological sample using classical immunohistological methods known to those of skill in the art (e.g., see Jalkanen, et al., J. Cell. Biol. 101:976-985 (1985); Jalkanen, et al., J. Cell . Biol. 105:3087-3096 (1987)).
  • Other antibody-based methods useful for detecting protein gene expression include immunoassays, such as the enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) and the radioimmunoassay (RIA).
  • Suitable antibody assay labels include enzyme labels, such as, glucose oxidase; radioisotopes, such as iodine (1251, 1211), carbon (14C), sulfur (35S), tritium (3H), indium (112In), and technetium (99Tc); luminescent labels, such as luminol; and fluorescent labels, such as fluorescein and rhodamine, and biotin.
  • enzyme labels such as, glucose oxidase
  • radioisotopes such as iodine (1251, 1211), carbon (14C), sulfur (35S), tritium (3H), indium (112In), and technetium (99Tc)
  • luminescent labels such as luminol
  • fluorescent labels such as fluorescein and rhodamine, and biotin.
  • diagnosis comprises: a) administering (for example, parenterally, subcutaneously, or intraperitoneally) to a subject an effective amount of a labeled molecule which specifically binds to the polypeptide of interest; b) waiting for a time interval following the administering for permitting the labeled molecule to preferentially concentrate at sites in the subject where the polypeptide is expressed (and for unbound labeled molecule to be cleared to background level); c) determining background level; and d) detecting the labeled molecule in the subject, such that detection of labeled molecule above the background level indicates that the subject has a particular disease or disorder associated with aberrant expression of the polypeptide of interest.
  • Background level can be determined by various methods including, comparing the amount of labeled molecule detected to a standard value previously determined for a particular
  • the size of the subject and the imaging system used will determine the quantity of imaging moiety needed to produce diagnostic images.
  • the quantity of radioactivity injected will normally range from about 5 to 20 millicuries of 99mTc.
  • the labeled antibody or antibody fragment will then preferentially accumulate at the location of cells which contain the specific protein.
  • In vivo tumor imaging is described in S.W. Burchiel et al., "Immunopharmacokinetics of Radiolabeled Antibodies and Their Fragments.” (Chapter 13 in Tumor Imaging: The Radiochemical Detection of Cancer, S.W. Burchiel and B. A. Rhodes, eds., Masson Publishing Inc. (1982).
  • the time interval following the administration for permitting the labeled molecule to preferentially concentrate at sites in the subject and for unbound labeled molecule to be cleared to background level is 6 to 48 hours or 6 to 24 hours or 6 to 12 hours. In another embodiment the time interval following administration is 5 to 20 days or 5 to 10 days.
  • monitoring of the disease or disorder is canied out by repeating the method for diagnosing the disease or disease, for example, one month after initial diagnosis, six months after initial diagnosis, one year after initial diagnosis, etc.
  • Presence of the labeled molecule can be detected in the patient using methods known in the art for in vivo scanning. These methods depend upon the type of label used. Skilled artisans will be able to determine the appropriate method for detecting a particular label. Methods and devices that may be used in the diagnostic methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, computed tomography (CT), whole body scan such as position emission tomography (PET), magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), and sonography.
  • CT computed tomography
  • PET position emission tomography
  • MRI magnetic resonance imaging
  • sonography sonography
  • the molecule is labeled with a radioisotope and is detected in the patient using a radiation responsive surgical instrument (Thurston et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,441,050).
  • the molecule is labeled with a fluorescent compound and is detected in the patient using a fluorescence responsive scanning instrument.
  • the molecule is labeled with a positron emitting metal and is detected in the patent using positron emission- tomography.
  • the molecule is labeled with a paramagnetic label and is detected in a patient using magnetic resonance imaging (MRI).
  • MRI magnetic resonance imaging
  • kits that can be used in the above methods.
  • a kit comprises an antibody of the invention, preferably a purified antibody, in one or more containers.
  • the kits of the present invention contain a substantially isolated polypeptide comprising an epitope which is specifically immunoreactive with an antibody included in the kit.
  • the kits of the present invention further comprise a control antibody which does not react with the polypeptide of interest.
  • kits of the present invention contain a means for detecting the binding of an antibody to a polypeptide of interest (e.g., the antibody may be conjugated to a detectable substrate such as a fluorescent compound, an enzymatic substrate, a radioactive compound or a luminescent compound, or a second antibody which recognizes the first antibody may be conjugated to a detectable substrate).
  • the kit is a diagnostic kit for use in screening serum containing antibodies specific against proliferative and/or cancerous polynucleotides and polypeptides. Such a kit may include a control antibody that does not react with the polypeptide of interest.
  • Such a kit may include a substantially isolated polypeptide antigen comprising an epitope which is specifically immunoreactive with at least one anti-polypeptide antigen antibody. Further, such a kit includes means for detecting the binding of said antibody to the antigen (e.g., the antibody may be conjugated to a fluorescent compound such as fluorescein or rhodamine which can be detected by flow cytometry). In specific embodiments, the kit may include a recombinantly produced or chemically synthesized polypeptide antigen. The polypeptide antigen of the kit may also be attached to a solid support.
  • the detecting means of the above-described kit includes a solid support to which said polypeptide antigen is attached.
  • a kit may also include a non-attached reporter-labeled anti-human antibody.
  • binding of the antibody to the polypeptide antigen can be detected by binding of the said reporter-labeled antibody.
  • the invention includes a diagnostic kit for use in screening serum containing antigens of the polypeptide of the invention.
  • the diagnostic kit includes a substantially isolated antibody specifically immunoreactive with polypeptide or polynucleotide antigens, and means for detecting the binding of the polynucleotide or polypeptide antigen to the antibody.
  • the antibody is attached to a solid support.
  • the antibody may be a monoclonal antibody.
  • the detecting means of the kit may include a second, labeled monoclonal antibody. Alternatively, or in addition, the detecting means may include a labeled, competing antigen.
  • test serum is reacted with a solid phase reagent having a surface-bound antigen obtained by the methods of the present invention.
  • the reagent After binding with specific antigen antibody to the reagent and removing unbound serum components by washing, the reagent is reacted with reporter-labeled anti-human antibody to bind reporter to the reagent in proportion to the amount of bound anti-antigen antibody on the solid support.
  • the reagent is again washed to remove unbound labeled antibody, and the amount of reporter associated with the reagent is determined.
  • the reporter is an enzyme which is detected by incubating the solid phase in the presence of a suitable fluorometric, luminescent or colorimetric substrate (Sigma, St. Louis, MO).
  • the solid surface reagent in the above assay is prepared by known techniques for attaching protein material to solid support material, such as polymeric beads, dip sticks, 96-well plate or filter material. These attachment methods generally include non-specific adsorption of the protein to the support or covalent attachment of the protein, typically through a free amine group, to a chemically reactive group on the solid support, such as an activated carboxyl, hydroxyl, or aldehyde group. Alternatively, streptavidin coated plates can be used in conjunction with biotinylated antigen(s).
  • the invention provides an assay system or kit for carrying out this diagnostic method.
  • the kit generally includes a support with surface- bound recombinant antigens, and a reporter-labeled anti-human antibody for detecting surface-bound anti-antigen antibody.
  • FGF-10 polypeptide can be used to generate fusion proteins.
  • the FGF-10 polypeptide when fused to a second protein, can be used as an antigenic tag.
  • Antibodies raised against the FGF-10 polypeptide can be used to indirectly detect the second protein by binding to the FGF-10.
  • secreted proteins target cellular locations based on trafficking signals, the FGF-10 polypeptides can be used as a targeting molecule once fused to other proteins.
  • FGF-10 proteins of the invention comprise fusion proteins wherein the FGF-10 polypeptides are those described above as m-n.
  • the application is directed to nucleic acid molecules at least 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the nucleic acid sequences encoding polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of the specific N- and C-terminal deletions recited herein. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention.
  • fusion proteins may also be engineered to improve characteristics of the FGF-10 polypeptide. For instance, a region of additional amino acids, particularly charged amino acids, may be added to the N-terminus of the FGF-10 polypeptide to improve stability and persistence during purification from the host cell or subsequent handling and storage. Also, peptide moieties may be added to the FGF-10 polypeptide to facilitate purification. Such regions may be removed prior to final preparation of the FGF-10 polypeptide. The addition of peptide moieties to facilitate handling of polypeptides are familiar and routine techniques in the art.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides including fragments, and specifically epitopes, can be combined with parts of the constant domain of immunoglobulins (IgG), resulting in chimeric polypeptides.
  • IgG immunoglobulins
  • fusion proteins facilitate purification and show an increased half-life in vivo.
  • chimeric proteins consisting of the first two domains of the human CD polypeptide and various domains of the constant regions of the heavy or light chains of mammalian immunoglobulins.
  • deleting the Fc part after the fusion protein has been expressed, detected, and purified, would be desired.
  • the Fc portion may hinder therapy and diagnosis if the fusion protein is used as an antigen for immunizations.
  • human proteins, such as hIL-5 have been fused with Fc portions for the purpose of high-throughput screening assays to identify antagonists of hIL-5. (See, D. Bennett et al., J. Molecular Recognition 8:52-58 (1995); K. Johanson et al., J . Biol. Chem. 270:9459-9471 (1995).)
  • the FGF-10 polypeptides can be fused to marker sequences, such as a peptide which facilitates purification of FGF-10.
  • the marker amino acid sequence is a hexa-histidine peptide, such as the tag provided in a pQE vector (QIAGEN, Inc., 9259 Eton Avenue, Chatsworth, CA, 91311), among others, many of which are commercially available.
  • hexa-histidine provides for convenient purification of the fusion protein.
  • HA hemagglutinin protein
  • the present invention also relates to vectors containing the FGF-10 polynucleotide, host cells, and the production of polypeptides by recombinant techniques.
  • the vector may be, for example, a phage, plasmid, viral, or retroviral vector. Retroviral vectors may be replication competent or replication defective. In the latter case, viral propagation generally will occur only in complementing host cells.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides may be joined to a vector containing a selectable marker for propagation in a host.
  • a plasmid vector is introduced in a precipitate, such as a calcium phosphate precipitate, or in a complex with a charged lipid.
  • the vector may be packaged in vitro using an appropriate packaging cell line and then transduced into host cells.
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotide insert should be operatively linked to an appropriate promoter, such as the phage lambda PL promoter, the E. coli lac, trp, phoA and tac promoters, the SV40 early and late promoters and promoters of retroviral LTRs, to name a few. Other suitable promoters will be known to the skilled artisan.
  • the expression constructs will further contain sites for transcription initiation, termination, and, in the transcribed region, a ribosome binding site for translation.
  • the coding portion of the transcripts expressed by the constructs will preferably include a translation initiating codon at the beginning and a termination codon (UAA,
  • the expression vectors will preferably include at least one selectable marker.
  • markers include dihydrofolate reductase, G418 or neomycin resistance for eukaryotic cell culture and tetracycline, kanamycin or ampicillin resistance genes for culturing in E. coli and other bacteria.
  • Representative examples of appropriate hosts include, but are not limited to, bacterial cells, such as E. coli, Streptomyces and Salmonella typhimurium cells; fungal cells, such as yeast cells (e.g., Saccharomyces cerevisiae or Pichia pastoris (ATCC Accession No.
  • insect cells such as Drosophila S2 and Spodoptera Sf9 cells
  • animal cells such as CHO, COS, 293, and Bowes melanoma cells
  • plant cells Appropriate culture mediums and conditions for the above-described host cells are known in the art.
  • vectors preferred for use in bacteria include pQE70, pQE60 and pQE- 9, available from QIAGEN, Inc.; pBluescript vectors, Phagescript vectors, pNH8A, pNH16a, pNH18A, pNH46A, available from Stratagene Cloning Systems, Inc.; and ptrc99a, pKK223-3, pKK233-3, pDR540, pRIT5 available from Pharmacia Biotech, Inc.
  • eukaryotic vectors are pWLNEO, pSV2CAT, pOG44, pXTl and pSG available from Stratagene; and pSVK3, pBPV, pMSG and pSVL available from Pharmacia.
  • Prefe ⁇ ed expression vectors for use in yeast systems include, but are not limited to pYES2, pYDl, pTEFl/Zeo, pYES2/GS, pPICZ, pGAPZ, pGAPZalph, pPIC9, pPIC3.5, pHIL-D2, pHIL-Sl, pPIC3.5K, pPIC9K, and PAO815 (all available from Invitrogen, Carlbad, CA).
  • Other suitable vectors will be readily apparent to the skilled artisan.
  • FGF- 10 polypeptides may in fact be expressed by a host cell lacking a recombinant vector.
  • the polynucleotide of the present invention may be employed for producing a polypeptide by recombinant techniques.
  • the polynucleotide sequence may be included in any one of a variety of expression vehicles, in particular vectors or plasmids for expressing a polypeptide.
  • vectors include chromosomal, nonchromosomal and synthetic DNA sequences, e.g., derivatives of SV40; bacterial plasmids; phage DNA; yeast plasmids; vectors derived from combinations of plasmids and phage DNA, viral DNA such as vaccinia, adenovirus, fowl pox virus, and pseudorabies.
  • any other vector or plasmid may be used as long as they are replicable and viable in the host.
  • the appropriate DNA sequence may be inserted into the vector by a variety of procedures.
  • the DNA sequence is inserted into an appropriate restriction endonuclease sites by procedures known in the art. Such procedures and others are deemed to be within the scope of those skilled in the art.
  • the DNA sequence in the expression vector may be operatively linked to an appropriate expression control sequence(s) (promoter) to direct mRNA synthesis.
  • promoter for example, LTR or SV40 promoter, the E. coli. lac or trp, the phage lambda PI promoter and other promoters known to control expression of genes in prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells or their viruses.
  • the expression vector also contains a ribosome binding site for translation initiation and a transcription terminator.
  • the vector may also include appropriate sequences for amplifying expression.
  • the expression vectors preferably contain a gene to provide a phenotypic trait for selection of transformed host cells such as dihydrofolate reductase or neomycin resistance for eukaryotic cell culture, or such as tetracycline or ampicillin resistance in E. coli.
  • the vector containing the appropriate DNA sequence as herein above described, as well as an appropriate promoter or control sequence, may be employed to transform an appropriate host to permit the host to express the protein.
  • appropriate hosts there may be mentioned: bacterial cells, such as E. coli. Salmonella typhimurium. Streptomyces: fungal cells, such as yeast; insect cells, such as Drosophila S2 and Spodoptera Sf9: animal cells such as CHO, COS or Bowes melanoma; adenoviruses; plant cells, etc.
  • bacterial cells such as E. coli.
  • Salmonella typhimurium Salmonella typhimurium.
  • Streptomyces fungal cells, such as yeast
  • insect cells such as Drosophila S2 and Spodoptera Sf9
  • animal cells such as CHO, COS or Bowes melanoma
  • adenoviruses adenoviruses
  • plant cells etc.
  • the selection of an appropriate host is deemed to be
  • the present invention also includes recombinant constructs comprising one or more of the sequences as broadly described above.
  • the constructs comprise a vector, such as a plasmid or viral vector, into which a sequence of the invention has been inserted, in a forward or reverse orientation.
  • the construct further comprises regulatory sequences, including, for example, a promoter, operably linked to the sequence.
  • a promoter operably linked to the sequence.
  • Bacterial pQE70, pQE60, pQE-9 (Qiagen), pBS, phagescript, psiX174, pBluescript SK, pBsKS, pNH8a, pNH16a, pNH18a, pNH46a (Stratagene); pTRC99A, pKK223-3, pKK233-3, pDR540, pRIT5 (Pharmacia).
  • Eukaryotic pWLneo, pSV2cat, pOG44, pXTl, pSG (Stratagene) pSVK3, pBPV, pMSG, pSVL (Pharmacia).
  • any other plasmid or vector may be used as long as they are replicable and viable in the host.
  • Promoter regions can be selected from any desired gene using CAT (chloramphenicol transferase) vectors or other vectors with selectable markers.
  • Two appropriate vectors are pKK232-8 and pCM7.
  • Particular named bacterial promoters include lad, lacZ, T3, T7, gpt, lambda PR, PL and trp.
  • Eukaryotic promoters include CMV immediate early, HSV thymidine kinase, early and late SV40, LTRs from retrovirus, and mouse metallothionein-I. Selection of the appropriate vector and promoter is well within the level of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the present invention relates to host cells containing the above-described construct.
  • the host cell can be a higher eukaryotic cell, such as a mammalian cell, or a lower eukaryotic cell, such as a yeast cell, or the host cell can be a prokaryotic cell, such as a bacterial cell.
  • Introduction of the construct into the host cell can be effected by calcium phosphate transfection, DEAE-Dextran mediated transfection, or electroporation (Davis, L., Dibner, M., Battey, I., Basic Methods in Molecular Biology, 1986)).
  • the constructs in host cells can be used in a conventional manner to produce the gene product encoded by the recombinant sequence.
  • the polypeptides of the invention can be synthetically produced by conventional peptide synthesizers. Mature proteins can be expressed in mammalian cells, yeast, bacteria, or other cells under the control of appropriate promoters. Cell-free translation systems can also be employed to produce such proteins using RNAs derived from the DNA constructs of the present invention. Appropriate cloning and expression vectors for use with prokaryotic and eukaryotic hosts are described by Sambrook, et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Second Edition, (Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989), the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
  • Enhancers are cis-acting elements of DNA, usually about from 10 to 300 bp, that act on a promoter to increase its transcription. Examples include the SV40 enhancer on the late side of the replication origin (bp 100 to 270), a cytomegalovirus early promoter enhancer, a polyoma enhancer on the late side of the replication origin, and adenovirus enhancers.
  • recombinant expression vectors will include origins of replication and selectable markers permitting transformation of the host cell, e.g., the ampicillin resistance gene of E. coli and S.
  • heterologous structural sequence is assembled in appropriate phase with translation, initiation and termination sequences, and preferably, a leader sequence capable of directing secretion of translated protein into the periplasmic space or extracellular medium.
  • the heterologous sequence can encode a fusion protein including an N-terminal identification peptide imparting desired characteristics, e.g., stabilization or simplified purification of expressed recombinant product.
  • Useful expression vectors for bacterial use are constructed by inserting a structural DNA sequence encoding a desired protein together with suitable translation, initiation and termination signals in operable reading phase with a functional promoter.
  • the vector will comprise one or more phenotypic selectable markers and an origin of replication to ensure maintenance of the vector and to, if desirable, provide amplification within the host.
  • Suitable prokaryotic hosts for transformation include coli. Bacillus subtilis. Salmonella typhimurium and various species within the genera Pseudomonas, Streptomyces, and Staphylococcus, although others may also be employed as a matter of choice.
  • useful expression vectors for bacterial use can comprise a selectable marker and bacterial origin of replication derived from commercially available plasmids comprising genetic elements of the well known cloning vector pBR322 (ATCC 37017).
  • cloning vector pBR322 ATCC 37017
  • Such commercial vectors include, for example, pKK223-3 (Pharmacia Fine Chemicals, Uppsala, Sweden) and GEM1 (Promega Biotec, Madison, Wl, USA). These pBR322 "backbone" sections are combined with an appropriate promoter and the structural sequence to be expressed.
  • the selected promoter is derepressed by appropriate means (e.g., temperature shift or chemical induction) and cells are cultured for an additional period.
  • appropriate means e.g., temperature shift or chemical induction
  • FGF-10 polypeptides can be recovered and purified from recombinant cell cultures by well-known methods including ammonium sulfate or ethanol precipitation, acid extraction, anion or cation exchange chromatography, phosphocellulose chromatography, hydrophobic interaction chromatography, affinity chromatography, hydroxylapatite chromatography and lectin chromatography. Most preferably, high performance liquid chromatography (“HPLC”) is employed for purification.
  • HPLC high performance liquid chromatography
  • FGF-10 polypeptides and preferably the secreted form, can also be recovered from: products purified from natural sources, including bodily fluids, tissues and cells, whether directly isolated or cultured; products of chemical synthetic procedures; and products produced by recombinant techniques from a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host, including, for example, bacterial, yeast, higher plant, insect, and mammalian cells.
  • a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host including, for example, bacterial, yeast, higher plant, insect, and mammalian cells.
  • the FGF-10 polypeptides may be glycosylated or may be non-glycosylated.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides may also include an initial modified methionine residue, in some cases as a result of host-mediated processes.
  • N-terminal methionine encoded by the translation initiation codon generally is removed with high efficiency from any protein after translation in all eukaryotic cells. While the N-terminal methionine on most proteins also is efficiently removed in most prokaryotes, for some proteins, this prokaryotic removal process is inefficient, depending on the nature of the amino acid to which the N-terminal methionine is covalently linked.
  • the yeast Pichia pastoris is used to express FGF-10 protein in a eukaryotic system.
  • Pichia pastoris is a methylotrophic yeast which can metabolize methanol as its sole carbon source.
  • a main step in the methanol metabolization pathway is the oxidation of methanol to formaldehyde using O 2 . This reaction is catalyzed by the enzyme alcohol oxidase.
  • Pichia pastoris In order to metabolize methanol as its sole carbon source, Pichia pastoris must generate high levels of alcohol oxidase due, in part, to the relatively low affinity of alcohol oxidase for O 2 .
  • alcohol oxidase produced from the AOXl gene comprises up to approximately 30% of the total soluble protein in Pichia pastoris. See, Ellis, S.B., et al., Mol. Cell. Biol. 5:1111-21 (1985); Koutz, P.J, et al., Yeast 5:167-77 (1989); Tschopp, J.F., et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 15:3859-76 (1987).
  • heterologous coding sequence such as, for example, a FGF-10 polynucleotide of the present invention, under the transcriptional regulation of all or part of the AOXl regulatory sequence is expressed at exceptionally high levels in Pichia yeast grown in the presence of methanol.
  • the plasmid vector pPIC9K is used to express DNA encoding a FGF-10 polypeptide of the invention, as set forth herein, in a Pichea yeast system essentially as described in "Pichia Protocols: Methods in Molecular Biology," D.R. Higgins and J. Cregg, eds. The Humana Press, Totowa, NJ, 1998.
  • This expression vector allows expression and secretion of a FGF-10 protein of the invention by virtue of the strong AOXl promoter linked to the Pichia pastoris alkaline phosphatase (PHO) secretory signal peptide (i.e., leader) located upstream of a multiple cloning site.
  • PHO alkaline phosphatase
  • yeast vectors could be used in place of pPIC9K, such as, pYES2, pYDl, pTEFl/Zeo, pYES2/GS, pPICZ, pGAPZ, pGAPZalpha, pPIC9, pPIC3.5, pHIL-D2, pHIL-Sl, pPIC3.5K, and PAO815, as one skilled in the art would readily appreciate, as long as the proposed expression construct provides appropriately located signals for transcription, translation, secretion (if desired), and the like, including an in-frame AUG as required.
  • high-level expression of a heterologous coding sequence such as, for example, a FGF-10 polynucleotide of the present invention
  • a heterologous coding sequence such as, for example, a FGF-10 polynucleotide of the present invention
  • an expression vector such as, for example, pGAPZ or pGAPZalpha
  • the invention also encompasses primary, secondary, and immortalized host cells of vertebrate origin, particularly mammalian origin, that have been engineered to delete or replace endogenous genetic material (e.g., FGF-10 coding sequence), and/or to include genetic material (e.g., heterologous polynucleotide sequences) that is operably associated with FGF-10 polynucleotides of the invention, and which activates, alters, and/or amplifies endogenous FGF-10 polynucleotides.
  • endogenous genetic material e.g., FGF-10 coding sequence
  • genetic material e.g., heterologous polynucleotide sequences
  • heterologous control regions e.g., promoter and/or enhancer
  • endogenous FGF-10 polynucleotide sequences via homologous recombination
  • heterologous control regions e.g., promoter and/or enhancer
  • endogenous FGF-10 polynucleotide sequences via homologous recombination
  • Cells may also be harvested by centrifugation, disrupted by physical or chemical means, and the resulting crude extract retained for further purification.
  • Microbial cells employed in expression of proteins can be disrupted by any convenient method, including freeze-thaw cycling, sonication, mechanical disruption, or use of cell lysing agents.
  • mammalian cell culture systems can also be employed to express recombinant protein.
  • mammalian expression systems include the COS-7 lines of monkey kidney fibroblasts, described by Gluzman, Cell, 23: 175 (1981), and other cell lines capable of expressing a compatible vector, for example, the C127, 3T3, CHO, HeLa and BHK cell lines.
  • Mammalian expression vectors will comprise an origin of replication, a suitable promoter and enhancer, and also any necessary ribosome binding sites, polyadenylation site, splice donor and acceptor sites, transcriptional termination sequences, and 5' flanking nontranscribed sequences.
  • DNA sequences derived from the SV40 viral genome for example, SV40 origin, early promoter, enhancer, splice, and polyadenylation sites may be used to provide the required nontranscribed genetic elements.
  • the polypeptide of the present invention may be recovered and purified from recombinant cell cultures by methods used heretofore, including ammonium sulfate or ethanol precipitation, acid extraction, anion or cation exchange chromatography, phosphocellulose chromatography, hydrophobic interaction chromatography, affinity chromatography, hydroxyapatite chromatography and lectin chromatography. Protein refolding steps can be used, as necessary, in completing configuration of the mature protein. Finally, high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) can be employed for final purification steps.
  • HPLC high performance liquid chromatography
  • polypeptide of the present invention may be a naturally purified product, or a product of chemical synthetic procedures, or produced by recombinant techniques from a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host (for example, by bacterial, yeast, higher plant, insect and mammalian cells in culture).
  • a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host for example, by bacterial, yeast, higher plant, insect and mammalian cells in culture.
  • the polypeptides of the present invention may be glycosylated with mammalian or other eukaryotic carbohydrates or may be non-glycosylated.
  • Polypeptides of the invention may also include an initial methionine amino acid residue.
  • polypeptides of the invention can be chemically synthesized using techniques known in the art (e.g.. see Creighton, 1983, Proteins: Structures and Molecular Principles, W.H. Freeman & Co., N.Y., and Hunkapiller, M., et al., 1984, Nature 310:105-111).
  • a peptide corresponding to a fragment of the FGF-10 polypeptides of the invention can be synthesized by use of a peptide synthesizer.
  • nonclassical amino acids or chemical amino acid analogs can be introduced as a substitution or addition into the FGF-10 polynucleotide sequence.
  • Non-classical amino acids include, but are not limited to, to the D-isomers of the common amino acids, 2,4-diaminobutyric acid, a-amino isobutyric acid, 4- aminobutyric acid, Abu, 2-amino butyric acid, g-Abu, e-Ahx, 6-amino hexanoic acid, Aib, 2-amino isobutyric acid, 3-amino propionic acid, ornithine, norleucine, norvaline, hydroxyproline, sarcosine, citrulline, homocitrulline, cysteic acid, t- butylglycine, t-butylalanine, phenylglycine, cyclohexylalanine, b-alanine, fluoro- amino acids, designer amino acids such as b-methyl amino acids, Ca-methyl amino acids, Na-methyl amino acids, and amino acid analogs in general. Furthermore, the amino acid can be D (
  • the invention encompasses FGF-10 polypeptides which are differentially modified during or after translation, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, phosphorylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to an antibody molecule or other cellular ligand, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications may be canied out by known techniques, including but not limited, to specific chemical cleavage by cyanogen bromide, trypsin, chymotrypsin, papain, V8 protease, NaBH 4 ; acetylation, formylation, oxidation, reduction; metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin; etc.
  • Additional post-translational modifications encompassed by the invention include, for example, e.g., N-linked or O-linked carbohydrate chains, processing of N-terminal or C-terminal ends), attachment of chemical moieties to the amino acid backbone, chemical modifications of N-linked or O-linked carbohydrate chains, and addition or deletion of an N-terminal methionine residue as a result of procaryotic host cell expression.
  • the polypeptides may also be modified with a detectable label, such as an enzymatic, fluorescent, isotopic or affinity label to allow for detection and isolation of the protein.
  • the chemical moieties for derivitization may be selected from water soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol, ethylene glycol/propylene glycol copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol and the like.
  • the polypeptides may be modified at random positions within the molecule, or at predetermined positions within the molecule and may include one, two, three or more attached chemical moieties.
  • the polymer may be of any molecular weight, and may be branched or unbranched.
  • the preferred molecular weight is between about 1 kDa and about 100 kDa (the term "about” indicating that in preparations of polyethylene glycol, some molecules will weigh more, some less, than the stated molecular weight) for ease in handling and manufacturing.
  • Other sizes may be used, depending on the desired therapeutic profile (e.g., the duration of sustained release desired, the effects, if any on biological activity, the ease in handling, the degree or lack of antigenicity and other known effects of the polyethylene glycol to a therapeutic protein or analog).
  • the polyethylene glycol may have an average molecular weight of about 200, 500, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4500, 5000, 5500, 6000, 6500, 7000, 7500, 8000, 8500, 9000, 9500, 10,000, 10,500, 11,000, 11,500, 12,000, 12,500, 13,000, 13,500, 14,000, 14,500, 15,000, 15,500, 16,000, 16,500, 17,000, 17,500, 18,000, 18,500, 19,000, 19,500, 20,000, 25,000, 30,000, 35,000, 40,000, 50,000, 55,000, 60,000, 65,000, 70,000, 75,000, 80,000, 85,000, 90,000, 95,000, or 100,000 kDa.
  • the polyethylene glycol may have a branched structure.
  • Branched polyethylene glycols are described, for example, in U.S. Patent No. 5,643,575; Morpurgo et al., Appl. Biochem. Biotechnol. 56:59-12 (1996); Vorobjev et al., Nucleosides Nucleotides 18:2145-2150 (1999); and Caliceti et al., Bioconjug. Chem. 70:638-646 (1999), the disclosures of each of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • polyethylene glycol molecules should be attached to the protein with consideration of effects on functional or antigenic domains of the protein.
  • attachment methods available to those skilled in the art, e.g., EP 0 401 384, herein incorporated by reference (coupling PEG to G-CSF), see also Malik et al., Exp. Hematol. 20:1028-1035 (1992) (reporting pegylation of GM-CSF using tresyl chloride).
  • polyethylene glycol may be covalently bound through amino acid residues via a reactive group, such as, a free amino or carboxyl group. Reactive groups are those to which an activated polyethylene glycol molecule may be bound.
  • the amino acid residues having a free amino group may include lysine residues and the N-terminal amino acid residues; those having a free carboxyl group may include aspartic acid residues glutamic acid residues and the C-terminal amino acid residue.
  • Sulfhydryl groups may also be used as a reactive group for attaching the polyethylene glycol molecules. Preferred for therapeutic purposes is attachment at an amino group, such as attachment at the N-terminus or lysine group.
  • polyethylene glycol may be attached to proteins via linkage to any of a number of amino acid residues.
  • polyethylene glycol can be linked to a proteins via covalent bonds to lysine, histidine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, or cysteine residues.
  • One or more reaction chemistries may be employed to attach polyethylene glycol to specific amino acid residues (e.g., lysine, histidine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, or cysteine) of the protein or to more than one type of amino acid residue (e.g., lysine, histidine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, cysteine and combinations thereof) of the protein.
  • polyethylene glycol as an illustration of the present composition, one may select from a variety of polyethylene glycol molecules (by molecular weight, branching, etc.), the proportion of polyethylene glycol molecules to protein (or peptide) molecules in the reaction mix, the type of pegylation reaction to be performed, and the method of obtaining the selected N-terminally pegylated protein.
  • the method of obtaining the N-terminally pegylated preparation i.e., separating this moiety from other monopegylated moieties if necessary
  • Selective proteins chemically modified at the N-terminus modification may be accomplished by reductive alkylation which exploits differential reactivity of different types of primary amino groups (lysine versus the N-terminal) available for derivatization in a particular protein. Under the appropriate reaction conditions, substantially selective derivatization of the protein at the N-terminus with a carbonyl group containing polymer is achieved.
  • pegylation of the proteins of the invention may be accomplished by any number of means.
  • polyethylene glycol may be attached to the protein either directly or by an intervening linker.
  • Linkerless systems for attaching polyethylene glycol to proteins are described in Delgado et al, Crit. Rev. Thera. Drug Carrier Sys. 9:249-304 (1992); Francis et al., Intern. J. of Hematol. 68:1-18 (1998); U.S. Patent No. 4,002,531 ; U.S. Patent No. 5,349,052; WO 95/06058; and WO 98/32466, the disclosures of each of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • One system for attaching polyethylene glycol directly to amino acid residues of proteins without an intervening linker employs tresylated MPEG, which is produced by the modification of monmethoxy polyethylene glycol (MPEG) using tresylchloride (ClSO 2 CH 2 CF 3 ).
  • MPEG monmethoxy polyethylene glycol
  • ClSO 2 CH 2 CF 3 tresylchloride
  • polyethylene glycol is directly attached to amine groups of the protein.
  • the invention includes protein-polyethylene glycol conjugates produced by reacting proteins of the invention with a polyethylene glycol molecule having a 2,2,2-trifluoreothane sulphonyl group.
  • Polyethylene glycol can also be attached to proteins using a number of different intervening linkers.
  • U.S. Patent No. 5,612,460 discloses urethane linkers for connecting polyethylene glycol to proteins.
  • Protein-polyethylene glycol conjugates wherein the polyethylene glycol is attached to the protein by a linker can also be produced by reaction of proteins with compounds such as MPEG- succinimidylsuccinate, MPEG activated with l,l'-carbonyldiimidazole, MPEG- 2,4,5-trichloropenylcarbonate, MPEG-p-nitrophenolcarbonate, and various MPEG- succinate derivatives.
  • the number of polyethylene glycol moieties attached to each protein of the invention may also vary.
  • the pegylated proteins of the invention may be linked, on average, to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 20, or more polyethylene glycol molecules.
  • the average degree of substitution within ranges such as 1-3, 2-4, 3-5, 4-6, 5-7, 6-8, 7-9, 8-10, 9-11, 10-12, 11-13, 12-14, 13-15, 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, or 18-20 polyethylene glycol moieties per protein molecule. Methods for determining the degree of substitution are discussed, for example, in Delgado et al, Crit. Rev. Thera. Drug Carrier Sys. 9:249-304 (1992).
  • the FGF-10 polypeptides of the invention may be in monomers or multimers (i.e., dimers, trimers, tetramers and higher multimers). Accordingly, the present invention relates to monomers and multimers of the FGF-10 polypeptides of the invention, their preparation, and compositions (preferably, pharmaceutical compositions) containing them.
  • the polypeptides of the invention are monomers, dimers, trimers or tetramers.
  • the multimers of the invention are at least dimers, at least trimers, or at least tetramers.
  • Multimers encompassed by the invention may be homomers or heteromers.
  • the term homomer refers to a multimer containing only FGF-10 polypeptides of the invention, e.g., polypeptides corresponding to the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:2 or encoded by the cDNA contained in the deposited clone (including FGF-10 fragments, variants, splice variants, and fusion proteins, as described herein). These homomers may contain FGF-10 polypeptides having identical or different amino acid sequences.
  • a homomer of the invention is a multimer containing only FGF-10 polypeptides having an identical amino acid sequence.
  • a homomer of the invention is a multimer containing FGF-10 polypeptides having different amino acid sequences.
  • the multimer of the invention is a homodimer (e.g., containing FGF-10 polypeptides having identical or different amino acid sequences) or a homotrimer (e.g., containing FGF-10 polypeptides having identical and/or different amino acid sequences).
  • the homomeric multimer of the invention is at least a homodimer, at least a homotrimer, or at least a homotetramer.
  • heteromer refers to a multimer containing one or more heterologous polypeptides (i.e., polypeptides of different proteins) in addition to the FGF-10 polypeptides of the invention.
  • the multimer of the invention is a heterodimer, a heterotrimer, or a heterotetramer.
  • the homomeric multimer of the invention is at least a homodimer, at least a homotrimer, or at least a homotetramer. Multimers of the invention may be the result of hydrophobic, hydrophilic, ionic and/or covalent associations and/or may be indirectly linked, by for example, liposome formation.
  • multimers of the invention such as, for example, homodimers or homotrimers
  • multimers of the invention are formed when polypeptides of the invention contact one another in solution.
  • heteromultimers of the invention such as, for example, heterotrimers or heterotetramers, are formed when polypeptides of the invention contact antibodies to the polypeptides of the invention (including antibodies to the heterologous polypeptide sequence in a fusion protein of the invention) in solution.
  • multimers of the invention are formed by covalent associations with and/or between the FGF-10 polypeptides of the invention.
  • covalent associations may involve one or more amino acid residues contained in the polypeptide sequence (e.g., that recited in SEQ ID NO:2, or contained in the polypeptide encoded by the clone HAGAT55).
  • the covalent associations are cross-linking between cysteine residues located within the polypeptide sequences which interact in the native (i.e., naturally occu ⁇ ing) polypeptide.
  • the covalent associations are the consequence of chemical or recombinant manipulation.
  • such covalent associations may involve one or more amino acid residues contained in the heterologous polypeptide sequence in a FGF-10 fusion protein.
  • covalent associations are between the heterologous sequence contained in a fusion protein of the invention (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925).
  • the covalent associations are between the heterologous sequence contained in a FGF-10-Fc fusion protein of the invention (as described herein).
  • covalent associations of fusion proteins of the invention are between heterologous polypeptide sequence from another Fibroblast Growth Factor family member that is capable of forming covalently associated multimers, such as for example, oseteoprotegerin (see, e.g., International Publication No. WO 98/49305, the contents of which are herein incorporated by reference in its entirety).
  • two or more polypeptides of the invention are joined through peptide linkers.
  • peptide linkers include those peptide linkers described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,073,627 (hereby incorporated by reference).
  • Proteins comprising multiple polypeptides of the invention separated by peptide linkers may be produced using conventional recombinant DNA technology.
  • Leucine zipper and isoleucine zipper domains are polypeptides that promote multimerization of the proteins in which they are found.
  • Leucine zippers were originally identified in several DNA-binding proteins (Landschulz et al., Science 240: 1759, (1988)), and have since been found in a variety of different proteins.
  • Leucine zippers are naturally occurring peptides and derivatives thereof that dimerize or trimerize.
  • leucine zipper domains suitable for producing soluble multimeric proteins of the invention are those described in PCT application WO 94/10308, hereby incorporated by reference.
  • Recombinant fusion proteins comprising a polypeptide of the invention fused to a polypeptide sequence that dimerizes or trimerizes in solution are expressed in suitable host cells, and the resulting soluble multimeric fusion protein is recovered from the culture supernatant using techniques known in the art.
  • Trimeric polypeptides of the invention may offer the advantage of enhanced biological activity.
  • Prefened leucine zipper moieties and isoleucine moieties are those that preferentially form trimers.
  • One example is a leucine zipper derived from lung surfactant protein D (SPD), as described in Hoppe et al. (FEBS Letters 344:191, (1994)) and in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/446,922, hereby incorporated by reference.
  • Other peptides derived from naturally occurring trimeric proteins may be employed in preparing trimeric polypeptides of the invention.
  • proteins of the invention are associated by interactions between Flag® polypeptide sequence contained in fusion proteins of the invention containing Flag® polypeptide seuqence.
  • associations proteins of the invention are associated by interactions between heterologous polypeptide sequence contained in Flag® fusion proteins of the invention and anti- Flag® antibody.
  • the multimers of the invention may be generated using chemical techniques known in the art.
  • polypeptides desired to be contained in the multimers of the invention may be chemically cross-linked using linker molecules and linker molecule length optimization techniques known in the art (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety).
  • multimers of the invention may be generated using techniques known in the art to form one or more inter-molecule cross-links between the cysteine residues located within the sequence of the polypeptides desired to be contained in the multimer (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein inco ⁇ orated by reference in its entirety).
  • polypeptides of the invention may be routinely modified by the addition of cysteine or biotin to the C terminus or N-terminus of the polypeptide and techniques known in the art may be applied to generate multimers containing one or more of these modified polypeptides (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety).
  • techniques known in the art may be applied to generate liposomes containing the polypeptide components desired to be contained in the multimer of the invention (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety).
  • multimers of the invention may be generated using genetic engineering techniques known in the art.
  • polypeptides contained in multimers of the invention are produced recombinantly using fusion protein technology described herein or otherwise known in the art (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein inco ⁇ orated by reference in its entirety).
  • polynucleotides coding for a homodimer of the invention are generated by ligating a polynucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide of the invention to a sequence encoding a linker polypeptide and then further to a synthetic polynucleotide encoding the translated product of the polypeptide in the reverse orientation from the original C-terminus to the N-terminus (lacking the leader sequence) (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein inco ⁇ orated by reference in its entirety).
  • recombinant techniques described herein or otherwise known in the art are applied to generate recombinant polypeptides of the invention which contain a transmembrane domain (or hyrophobic or signal peptide) and which can be inco ⁇ orated by membrane reconstitution techniques into liposomes (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein inco ⁇ orated by reference in its entirety).
  • FGF-10 Polynucleotides The FGF-10 polynucleotides identified herein can be used in numerous ways as reagents. The following description should be considered exemplary and utilizes known techniques.
  • sequences can be mapped to chromosomes by preparing PCR primers (preferably 15-25 bp) from the sequences shown in SEQ ID NO:l. Primers can be selected using computer analysis so that primers do not span more than one predicted exon in the genomic DNA. These primers are then used for PCR screening of somatic cell hybrids containing individual human chromosomes. Only those hybrids containing the human FGF-10 gene corresponding to the SEQ ID NO: 1 will yield an amplified fragment.
  • somatic hybrids provide a rapid method of PCR mapping the polynucleotides to particular chromosomes. Three or more clones can be assigned per day using a single thermal cycler. Moreover, sublocalization of the FGF-10 polynucleotides can be achieved with panels of specific chromosome fragments.
  • Other gene mapping strategies that can be used include in situ hybridization, prescreening with labeled flow-sorted chromosomes, and preselection by hybridization to construct chromosome specific-cDNA libraries.
  • FISH fluorescence in situ hybridization
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotides can be used individually (to mark a single chromosome or a single site on that chromosome) or in panels (for marking multiple sites and/or multiple chromosomes). Prefened polynucleotides correspond to the noncoding regions of the cDNAs because the coding sequences are more likely conserved within gene families, thus increasing the chance of cross hybridization during chromosomal mapping.
  • the physical position of the polynucleotide can be used in linkage analysis. Linkage analysis establishes coinheritance between a chromosomal location and presentation of a particular disease.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides Any of these alterations (altered expression, chromosomal rearrangement, or mutation) can be used as a diagnostic or prognostic marker.
  • the invention also provides a diagnostic method useful during diagnosis of a disorder, involving measuring the expression level of polynucleotides of the present invention in cells or body fluid from an individual and comparing the measured gene expression level with a standard level of polynucleotide expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the gene expression level compared to the standard is indicative of a disorder.
  • the invention includes a kit for analyzing samples for the presence of proliferative and/or cancerous polynucleotides derived from a test subject.
  • the kit includes at least one polynucleotide probe containing a nucleotide sequence that will specifically hybridize with a polynucleotide of the present invention and a suitable container.
  • the kit includes two polynucleotide probes defining an internal region of the polynucleotide of the present invention, where each probe has one strand containing a 31'mer-end internal to the region.
  • the probes may be useful as primers for polymerase chain reaction amplification.
  • the present invention is useful as a prognostic indicator, whereby patients exhibiting enhanced or depressed polynucleotide of the present invention expression will experience a worse clinical outcome relative to patients expressing the gene at a level nearer the standard level.
  • measuring the expression level of polynucleotide of the present invention is intended qualitatively or quantitatively measuring or estimating the level of the polypeptide of the present invention or the level of the mRNA encoding the polypeptide in a first biological sample either directly (e.g., by determining or estimating absolute protein level or mRNA level) or relatively (e.g., by comparing to the polypeptide level or mRNA level in a second biological sample).
  • the polypeptide level or mRNA level in the first biological sample is measured or estimated and compared to a standard polypeptide level or mRNA level, the standard being taken from a second biological sample obtained from an individual not having the disorder or being determined by averaging levels from a population of individuals not having a disorder.
  • a standard polypeptide level or mRNA level is known, it can be used repeatedly as a standard for comparison.
  • biological sample any biological sample obtained from an individual, body fluid, cell line, tissue culture, or other source which contains the polypeptide of the present invention or mRNA.
  • biological samples include body fluids (such as semen, lymph, sera, plasma, urine, synovial fluid and spinal fluid) which contain the polypeptide of the present invention, and other tissue sources found to express the polypeptide of the present invention. Methods for obtaining tissue biopsies and body fluids from mammals are well known in the art. Where the biological sample is to include mRNA, a tissue biopsy is the prefened source.
  • the method(s) provided above may preferrably be applied in a diagnostic method and/or kits in which polynucleotides and/or polypeptides are attached to a solid support.
  • the support may be a "gene chip” or a "biological chip” as described in US Patents 5,837,832, 5,874,219, and 5,856,174.
  • a gene chip with polynucleotides of the present invention attached may be used to identify polymorphisms between the polynucleotide sequences, with polynucleotides isolated from a test subject. The knowledge of such polymo ⁇ hisms (i.e.
  • the present invention encompasses polynucleotides of the present invention that are chemically synthesized, or reproduced as peptide nucleic acids (PNA), or according to other methods known in the art.
  • PNA peptide nucleic acids
  • the use of PNAs would serve as the preferred form if the polynucleotides are inco ⁇ orated onto a solid support, or gene chip.
  • a peptide nucleic acid (PNA) is a polyamide type of DNA analog and the monomeric units for adenine, guanine, thymine and cytosine are available commercially (Perceptive Biosystems). Certain components of DNA, such as phosphorus, phosphorus oxides, or deoxyribose derivatives, are not present in PNAs.
  • PNAs bind specifically and tightly to complementary DNA strands and are not degraded by nucleases. In fact, PNA binds more strongly to DNA than DNA itself does. This is probably because there is no electrostatic repulsion between the two strands, and also the polyamide backbone is more flexible.
  • PNA/DNA duplexes bind under a wider range of stringency conditions than DNA/DNA duplexes, making it easier to perform multiplex hybridization. Smaller probes can be used than with DNA due to the strong binding. In addition, it is more likely that single base mismatches can be determined with PNA/DNA hybridization because a single mismatch in a PNA/DNA 15-mer lowers the melting point (T.sub.m) by 8°-20° C, vs. 4°-16° C for the DNA DNA 15- mer duplex. Also, the absence of charge groups in PNA means that hybridization can be done at low ionic strengths and reduce possible interference by salt during the analysis.
  • the present invention is useful for detecting cancer in mammals.
  • the invention is useful during diagnosis of pathological cell proliferative neoplasias which include, but are not limited to: acute myelogenous leukemias including acute monocytic leukemia, acute myeloblastic leukemia, acute promyelocytic leukemia, acute myelomonocytic leukemia, acute erythroleukemia, acute megakaryocytic leukemia, and acute undifferentiated leukemia, etc.; and chronic myelogenous leukemias including chronic myelomonocytic leukemia, chronic granulocytic leukemia, etc.
  • Preferred mammals include monkeys, apes, cats, dogs, cows, pigs, horses, rabbits and humans. Particularly preferred are humans.
  • Pathological cell proliferative disorders are often associated with inappropriate activation of proto-oncogenes. (Gelmann, E. P. et al., "The Etiology of Acute Leukemia: Molecular Genetics and Viral Oncology," in Neoplastic Diseases of the Blood, Vol 1., Wiernik, P. H. et al. eds., 161-182 (1985)).
  • Neoplasias are now believed to result from the qualitative alteration of a normal cellular gene product, or from the quantitative modification of gene expression by insertion into the chromosome of a viral sequence, by chromosomal translocation of a gene to a more actively transcribed region, or by some other mechanism.
  • mutated or altered expression of specific genes is involved in the pathogenesis of some leukemias, among other tissues and cell types.
  • the human counte ⁇ arts of the oncogenes involved in some animal neoplasias have been amplified or translocated in some cases of human leukemia and carcinoma.
  • c-myc expression is highly amplified in the non-lymphocytic leukemia cell line HL-60.
  • HL-60 cells When HL-60 cells are chemically induced to stop proliferation, the level of c-myc is found to be downregulated.
  • International Publication Number WO 91/15580 it has been shown that exposure of HL-60 cells to a DNA construct that is complementary to the 5' end of c-myc or c- myb blocks translation of the corresponding mRNAs which downregulates expression of the c-myc or c-myb proteins and causes anest of cell proliferation and differentiation of the treated cells.
  • a FGF-10 polynucleotide can be used to control gene expression through triple helix formation or antisense DNA or RNA. Both methods rely on binding of the polynucleotide to DNA or RNA. For these techniques, prefened polynucleotides are usually 20 to 40 bases in length and complementary to either the region of the gene involved in transcription (triple helix - see Lee et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 3:173 (1979); Cooney et al., Science 241 :456 (1988); and Dervan et al., Science 251:1360 (1991) ) or to the mRNA itself (antisense - Okano, J. Neurochem.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides are also useful in gene therapy.
  • One goal of gene therapy is to insert a normal gene into an organism having a defective gene, in an effort to conect the genetic defect.
  • FGF-10 offers a means of targeting such genetic defects in a highly accurate manner.
  • Another goal is to insert a new gene that was not present in the host genome, thereby producing a new trait in the host cell.
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotides are also useful for identifying individuals from minute biological samples.
  • the United States military for example, is considering the use of restriction fragment length polymorphism (RFLP) for identification of its personnel. In this technique, an individual's genomic DNA is digested with one or more restriction enzymes, and probed on a Southern blot to yield unique bands for identifying personnel.
  • RFLP restriction fragment length polymorphism
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotides can be used as additional DNA markers for RFLP.
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotides can also be used as an alternative to RFLP, by determining the actual base-by-base DNA sequence of selected portions of an individual's genome. These sequences can be used to prepare PCR primers for amplifying and isolating such selected DNA, which can then be sequenced. Using this technique, individuals can be identified because each individual will have a unique set of DNA sequences. Once an unique ID database is established for an individual, positive identification of that individual, living or dead, can be made from extremely small tissue samples.
  • DNA sequences taken from very small biological samples such as tissues, e.g., hair or skin, or body fluids, e.g., blood, saliva, semen, etc.
  • DNA sequences amplified from polymo ⁇ hic loci such as DQa class II HLA gene, are used in forensic biology to identify individuals.
  • reagents capable of identifying the source of a particular tissue. Such need arises, for example, in forensics when presented with tissue of unknown origin.
  • Appropriate reagents can comprise, for example, DNA probes or primers specific to particular tissue prepared from FGF-10 sequences.
  • Panels of such reagents can identify tissue by species and/or by organ type. In a similar fashion, these reagents can be used to screen tissue cultures for contamination.
  • FGF-10 is expressed in 8 week old early stage human tissue and subsequently the full length cDNA was found in a library derived from the human Amygdala.
  • cancers of these tissues as well as other cancerous tissues in mammals can express significantly enhanced levels of the FGF- 10 protein and mRNA encoding the FGF-10 protein when compared to a corresponding "standard" level.
  • enhanced levels of the FGF-10 protein can be detected in certain body fluids (e.g., sera, plasma, urine, and spinal fluid) from mammals with such a cancer when compared to sera from mammals of the same species not having the cancer.
  • the invention provides a diagnostic method useful during diagnosis of a disorder involving FGF-10 expression, including cancers, which involves measuring the expression level of the gene encoding the FGF-10 protein in ovarian, renal or neurological system tissue or other cells or body fluid from an individual and comparing the measured gene expression level with a standard FGF-10 gene expression level in that tissue, cell or fluid, whereby an increase or decrease in the gene expression level compared to the standard is indicative of a disorder related to FGF-10 expression.
  • the present invention is useful as a prognostic indicator, whereby patients exhibiting enhanced or FGF-10 gene expression will experience a worse clinical outcome relative to patients expressing the gene at a level nearer the standard level.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides are useful as hybridization probes for differential identification of the tissue(s) or cell type(s) present in a biological sample.
  • polypeptides and antibodies directed to FGF-10 polypeptides are useful to provide immunological probes for differential identification of the tissue(s) or cell type(s).
  • FGF-10 gene expression may be detected in certain tissues (e.g., cancerous and wounded tissues) or bodily fluids (e.g., serum, plasma, urine, synovial fluid or spinal fluid) taken from an individual having such a disorder, relative to a "standard" FGF-10 gene expression level, i.e., the FGF-10 expression level in healthy tissue from an individual not having the disorder.
  • tissues e.g., cancerous and wounded tissues
  • bodily fluids e.g., serum, plasma, urine, synovial fluid or spinal fluid
  • the invention provides a diagnostic method of a disorder, which involves: (a) assaying FGF-10 gene expression level in cells or body fluid of an individual; (b) comparing the FGF-10 gene expression level with a standard FGF-10 gene expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the assayed FGF-10 gene expression level compared to the standard expression level is indicative of the disorder.
  • a diagnostic method of a disorder involves: (a) assaying FGF-10 gene expression level in cells or body fluid of an individual; (b) comparing the FGF-10 gene expression level with a standard FGF-10 gene expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the assayed FGF-10 gene expression level compared to the standard expression level is indicative of the disorder.
  • the presence of a relatively high amount of transcript in biopsied tissue from an individual may indicate a predisposition for the development of the disease, or may provide a means for detecting the disease prior to the appearance of actual clinical symptoms.
  • a more definitive diagnosis of this type may allow health professionals to employ preventative measures or aggressive treatment
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotides can be used as molecular weight markers on Southern gels, as diagnostic probes for the presence of a specific mRNA in a particular cell type, as a probe to "subtract-out" known sequences in the process of discovering novel polynucleotides, for selecting and making oligomers for attachment to a "gene chip” or other support, to raise anti-DNA antibodies using DNA immunization techniques, and as an antigen to elicit an immune response.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides can be used in numerous ways. The following description should be considered exemplary and utilizes known techniques.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides can be used to assay protein levels in a biological sample using antibody-based techniques.
  • protein expression in tissues can be studied with classical immunohistological methods.
  • Other antibody-based methods useful for detecting protein gene expression include immunoassays, such as the enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) and the radioimmunoassay (RIA).
  • ELISA enzyme linked immunosorbent assay
  • RIA radioimmunoassay
  • Suitable antibody assay labels include enzyme labels, such as, glucose oxidase, and radioisotopes, such as iodine (1251, 1211), carbon (14C), sulfur (35S), tritium (3H), indium (112In), and technetium (99mTc), and fluorescent labels, such as fluorescein and rhodamine, and biotin.
  • enzyme labels such as, glucose oxidase, and radioisotopes, such as iodine (1251, 1211), carbon (14C), sulfur (35S), tritium (3H), indium (112In), and technetium (99mTc)
  • fluorescent labels such as fluorescein and rhodamine, and biotin.
  • proteins can also be detected in vivo by imaging.
  • Antibody labels or markers for in vivo imaging of protein include those detectable by X-radiography, NMR or ESR.
  • suitable labels include radioisotopes such as barium or cesium, which emit detectable radiation but are not overtly harmful to the subject.
  • Suitable markers for NMR and ESR include those with a detectable characteristic spin, such as deuterium, which may be inco ⁇ orated into the antibody by labeling of nutrients for the relevant hybridoma.
  • a protein-specific antibody or antibody fragment which has been labeled with an appropriate detectable imaging moiety such as a radioisotope (for example, 1311, 112In, 99mTc), a radio-opaque substance, or a material detectable by nuclear magnetic resonance, is introduced (for example, parenterally, subcutaneously, or intraperitoneally) into the mammal.
  • a radioisotope for example, 1311, 112In, 99mTc
  • a radio-opaque substance for example, parenterally, subcutaneously, or intraperitoneally
  • the quantity of radioactivity injected will normally range from about 5 to 20 millicuries of 99mTc.
  • the labeled antibody or antibody fragment will then preferentially accumulate at the location of cells which contain the specific protein.
  • In vivo tumor imaging is described in S.W. Burchiel et al., "Immunopharmacokinetics of Radiolabeled Antibodies and Their Fragments.” (Chapter 13 in Tumor Imaging: The Radiochemical Detection of Cancer, S.W. Burchiel and B. A. Rhodes, eds., Masson Publishing Inc.
  • the invention provides a diagnostic method of a disorder, which involves (a) assaying the expression of FGF-10 polypeptide in cells or body fluid of an individual; (b) comparing the level of gene expression with a standard gene expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the assayed FGF-10 polypeptide gene expression level compared to the standard expression level is indicative of a disorder.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides can be used to treat, prevent and/or diagnose disease.
  • patients can be administered FGF-10 polypeptides in an effort to replace absent or decreased levels of the FGF-10 polypeptide (e.g., insulin), to supplement absent or decreased levels of a different polypeptide (e.g., hemoglobin S for hemoglobin B), to inhibit the activity of a polypeptide (e.g., an oncogene), to activate the activity of a polypeptide (e.g., by binding to a receptor), to reduce the activity of a membrane bound receptor by competing with it for free ligand (e.g., soluble TNF receptors used in reducing inflammation), or to bring about a desired response (e.g., blood vessel growth).
  • FGF-10 polypeptide e.g., insulin
  • a different polypeptide e.g., hemoglobin S for hemoglobin B
  • an oncogene e.g., an oncogene
  • an oncogene to activate the activity
  • antibodies directed to FGF-10 polypeptides can also be used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose disease.
  • administration of an antibody directed to a FGF-10 polypeptide can bind and reduce ove ⁇ roduction of the polypeptide.
  • administration of an antibody can activate the polypeptide, such as by binding to a polypeptide bound to a membrane (receptor).
  • the FGF-10 polypeptides can be used as molecular weight markers on SDS-PAGE gels or on molecular sieve gel filtration columns using methods well known to those of skill in the art.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides can also be used to raise antibodies, which in turn are used to measure protein expression from a recombinant cell, as a way of assessing transformation of the host cell. Moreover, FGF-10 polypeptides can be used to test the following biological activities.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is to gene therapy methods for treating and/or preventing disorders, diseases and conditions.
  • the gene therapy methods relate to the introduction of nucleic acid (DNA, RNA and antisense DNA or RNA) sequences into an animal to achieve expression of the FGF-10 polypeptide of the present invention.
  • This method requires a polynucleotide which codes for a FGF-10 polypeptide operatively linked to a promoter and any other genetic elements necessary for the expression of the polypeptide by the target tissue.
  • Such gene therapy and delivery techniques are known in the art, see, for example, WO90/11092, which is herein incorporated by reference.
  • cells from a patient may be engineered with a polynucleotide (DNA or RNA) comprising a promoter operably linked to a FGF-10 polynucleotide ex vivo, with the engineered cells then being provided to a patient to be treated with the polypeptide.
  • a polynucleotide DNA or RNA
  • Such methods are well-known in the art. For example, see Belldegrun, A., et al., J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 85: 207-216 (1993); Ferrantini, M. et al., Cancer Research 53: 1107-1112 (1993); Fenantini, M. et al., J.
  • the cells which are engineered are arterial cells.
  • the arterial cells may be reintroduced into the patient through direct injection to the artery, the tissues su ⁇ ounding the artery, or through catheter injection.
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotide constructs can be delivered by any method that delivers injectable materials to the cells of an animal, such as, injection into the interstitial space of tissues (heart, muscle, skin, lung, liver, and the like).
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotide constructs may be delivered in a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid or aqueous canier.
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotide is delivered as a naked polynucleotide.
  • naked polynucleotide, DNA or RNA refers to sequences that are free from any delivery vehicle that acts to assist, promote or facilitate entry into the cell, including viral sequences, viral particles, liposome formulations, lipofectin or precipitating agents and the like.
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotides can also be delivered in liposome formulations and lipofectin formulations and the like can be prepared by methods well known to those skilled in the art. Such methods are described, for example, in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,593,972, 5,589,466, and 5,580,859, which are herein incorporated by reference.
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotide vector constructs used in the gene therapy method are preferably constructs that will not integrate into the host genome nor will they contain sequences that allow for replication.
  • Appropriate vectors include pWLNEO, pSV2CAT, pOG44, pXTl and pSG available from Stratagene; pSVK3, pBPV, pMSG and pSVL available from Pharmacia; and pEFl/V5, pcDNA3.1 , and pRc/CMV2 available from Invitrogen.
  • Other suitable vectors will be readily apparent to the skilled artisan.
  • Suitable promoters include adenoviral promoters, such as the adenoviral major late promoter; or heterologous promoters, such as the cytomegalovirus (CMV) promoter; the respiratory syncytial virus (RSV) promoter; inducible promoters, such as the MMT promoter, the metallothionein promoter; heat shock promoters; the albumin promoter; the ApoAI promoter; human globin promoters; viral thymidine kinase promoters, such as the Herpes Simplex thymidine kinase promoter; retroviral LTRs; the b-actin promoter; and human growth hormone promoters.
  • the promoter also may be the native promoter for FGF-10.
  • one major advantage of introducing naked nucleic acid sequences into target cells is the transitory nature of the polynucleotide synthesis in the cells. Studies have shown that non-replicating DNA sequences can be introduced into cells to provide production of the desired polypeptide for periods of up to six months.
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotide construct can be delivered to the interstitial space of tissues within the an animal, including of muscle, skin, brain, lung, liver, spleen, bone marrow, thymus, heart, lymph, blood, bone, cartilage, pancreas, kidney, gall bladder, stomach, intestine, testis, ovary, uterus, rectum, nervous system, eye, gland, and connective tissue.
  • Interstitial space of the tissues comprises the intercellular, fluid, mucopolysaccharide matrix among the reticular fibers of organ tissues, elastic fibers in the walls of vessels or chambers, collagen fibers of fibrous tissues, or that same matrix within connective tissue ensheathing muscle cells or in the lacunae of bone.
  • the space occupied by the plasma of the circulation and the lymph fluid of the lymphatic channels Delivery to the interstitial space of muscle tissue is preferred for the reasons discussed below. They may be conveniently delivered by injection into the tissues comprising these cells. They are preferably delivered to and expressed in persistent, non-dividing cells which are differentiated, although delivery and expression may be achieved in non-differentiated or less completely differentiated cells, such as, for example, stem cells of blood or skin fibroblasts. In vivo muscle cells are particularly competent in their ability to take up and express polynucleotides.
  • an effective dosage amount of DNA or RNA will be in the range of from about 0.05 mg/kg body weight to about 50 mg/kg body weight.
  • the dosage will be from about 0.005 mg/kg to about 20 mg/kg and more preferably from about 0.05 mg/kg to about 5 mg/kg.
  • this dosage will vary according to the tissue site of injection.
  • the appropriate and effective dosage of nucleic acid sequence can readily be determined by those of ordinary skill in the art and may depend on the condition being treated and the route of administration.
  • the prefened route of administration is by the parenteral route of injection into the interstitial space of tissues.
  • parenteral routes may also be used, such as, inhalation of an aerosol formulation particularly for delivery to lungs or bronchial tissues, throat or mucous membranes of the nose.
  • naked FGF- 10 DNA constructs can be delivered to arteries during angioplasty by the catheter used in the procedure.
  • the naked polynucleotides are delivered by any method known in the art, including, but not limited to, direct needle injection at the delivery site, intravenous injection, topical administration, catheter infusion, and so-called "gene guns”. These delivery methods are known in the art.
  • naked FGF-10 nucleic acid sequences can be administered in vivo results in the successful expression of FGF-10 polypeptide in the femoral arteries of rabbits.
  • constructs may also be delivered with delivery vehicles such as viral sequences, viral particles, liposome formulations, lipofectin, precipitating agents, etc. Such methods of delivery are known in the art.
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotide constructs are complexed in a liposome preparation.
  • Liposomal preparations for use in the instant invention include cationic (positively charged), anionic (negatively charged) and neutral preparations.
  • cationic liposomes are particularly preferred because a tight charge complex can be formed between the cationic liposome and the polyanionic nucleic acid.
  • Cationic liposomes have been shown to mediate intracellular delivery of plasmid DNA (Feigner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (1987) 84:7413-7416, which is herein incorporated by reference); mRNA (Malone et al., Proc. Natl.
  • Cationic liposomes are readily available.
  • N[l-2,3-dioleyloxy)propyl]-N,N,N-triethylammonium (DOTMA) liposomes are particularly useful and are available under the trademark Lipofectin, from GIBCO BRL, Grand Island, N.Y. (See, also, Feigner et al., Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA (1987) 84:7413-7416, which is herein incorporated by reference).
  • Other commercially available liposomes include transfectace (DDAB/DOPE) and DOTAP/DOPE (Boehringer).
  • cationic liposomes can be prepared from readily available materials using techniques well known in the art. See, e.g. PCT Publication No. WO 90/11092 (which is herein inco ⁇ orated by reference) for a description of the synthesis of DOTAP (l,2-bis(oleoyloxy)-3-(trimethylammonio)propane) liposomes. Preparation of DOTMA liposomes is explained in the literature, see, e.g., P. Feigner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:7413-7417, which is herein inco ⁇ orated by reference. Similar methods can be used to prepare liposomes from other cationic lipid materials.
  • anionic and neutral liposomes are readily available, such as from
  • Avanti Polar Lipids can be easily prepared using readily available materials.
  • Such materials include phosphatidyl, choline, cholesterol, phosphatidyl ethanolamine, dioleoylphosphatidyl choline (DOPC), dioleoylphosphatidyl glycerol (DOPG), dioleoylphoshatidyl ethanolamine (DOPE), among others.
  • DOPC dioleoylphosphatidyl choline
  • DOPG dioleoylphosphatidyl glycerol
  • DOPE dioleoylphoshatidyl ethanolamine
  • These materials can also be mixed with the DOTMA and DOTAP starting materials in appropriate ratios. Methods for making liposomes using these materials are well known in the art.
  • DOPC dioleoylphosphatidyl choline
  • DOPG dioleoylphosphatidyl glycerol
  • DOPE dioleoylphosphatidyl ethanolamine
  • DOPG/DOPC vesicles can be prepared by drying 50 mg each of DOPG and DOPC under a stream of nitrogen gas into a sonication vial. The sample is placed under a vacuum pump overnight and is hydrated the following day with deionized water.
  • the sample is then sonicated for 2 hours in a capped vial, using a Heat Systems model 350 sonicator equipped with an inverted cup (bath type) probe at the maximum setting while the bath is circulated at 15EC.
  • negatively charged vesicles can be prepared without sonication to produce multilamellar vesicles or by extrusion through nucleopore membranes to produce unilamellar vesicles of discrete size.
  • Other methods are known and available to those of skill in the art.
  • the liposomes can comprise multilamellar vesicles (MLVs), small unilamellar vesicles (SUVs), or large unilamellar vesicles (LUVs), with SUVs being preferred.
  • MLVs multilamellar vesicles
  • SUVs small unilamellar vesicles
  • LUVs large unilamellar vesicles
  • the various liposome-nucleic acid complexes are prepared using methods well known in the art. See, e.g., Straubinger et al., Methods of Immunology (1983), 101:512-527, which is herein inco ⁇ orated by reference.
  • MLVs containing nucleic acid can be prepared by depositing a thin film of phospholipid on the walls of a glass tube and subsequently hydrating with a solution of the material to be encapsulated.
  • SUVs are prepared by extended sonication of MLVs to produce a homogeneous population of unilamellar liposomes.
  • the material to be entrapped is added to a suspension of preformed MLVs and then sonicated.
  • liposomes containing cationic lipids the dried lipid film is resuspended in an appropriate solution such as sterile water or an isotonic buffer solution such as 10 mM Tris/NaCl, sonicated, and then the preformed liposomes are mixed directly with the DNA.
  • the liposome and DNA form a very stable complex due to binding of the positively charged liposomes to the cationic DNA.
  • SUVs find use with small nucleic acid fragments.
  • LUVs are prepared by a number of methods, well known in the art. Commonly used methods include Ca 2+ -EDTA chelation (Papahadjopoulos et al., Biochim. Biophys. Acta (1975) 394:483; Wilson et al., Cell (1979) 17:77); ether injection (Deamer, D. and Bangham, A., Biochim. Biophys. Acta (1976) 443:629; Ostro et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. (1977) 76:836; Fraley et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (1979) 76:3348); detergent dialysis (Enoch, H.
  • the ratio of DNA to liposomes will be from about 10:1 to about 1:10.
  • the ration will be from about 5:1 to about 1:5. More preferably, the ration will be about 3:1 to about 1:3. Still more preferably, the ratio will be about 1:1.
  • U.S. Patent No. 5,676,954 (which is herein incorporated by reference) reports on the injection of genetic material, complexed with cationic liposomes carriers, into mice.
  • WO 94/9469 (which are herein incorporated by reference) provide cationic lipids for use in transfecting DNA into cells and mammals.
  • U.S. Patent Nos. 5,589,466, 5,693,622, 5,580,859, 5,703,055, and international publication no. WO 94/9469 (which are herein incorporated by reference) provide methods for delivering DNA-cationic lipid complexes to mammals.
  • cells are be engineered, ex vivo or in vivo, using a retroviral particle containing RNA which comprises a sequence encoding FGF-10.
  • Retroviruses from which the retroviral plasmid vectors may be derived include, but are not limited to, Moloney Murine Leukemia Virus, spleen necrosis virus, Rous sarcoma Virus, Harvey Sarcoma Virus, avian leukosis virus, gibbon ape leukemia virus, human immunodeficiency virus, Myeloproliferative Sarcoma Virus, and mammary tumor virus.
  • the retroviral plasmid vector is employed to transduce packaging cell lines to form producer cell lines.
  • packaging cells which may be transfected include, but are not limited to, the PE501, PA317, R-2, R-AM, PA12, T19-14X, VT- 19-17-H2, RCRE, RCRIP, GP+E-86, GP+envAml2, and DAN cell lines as described in Miller, Human Gene Therapy 1:5-14 (1990), which is inco ⁇ orated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • the vector may transduce the packaging cells through any means known in the art. Such means include, but are not limited to, electroporation, the use of liposomes, and CaPO 4 precipitation.
  • the retroviral plasmid vector may be encapsulated into a liposome, or coupled to a lipid, and then administered to a host.
  • the producer cell line generates infectious retroviral vector particles which include polynucleotide encoding FGF-10. Such retroviral vector particles then may be employed, to transduce eukaryotic cells, either in vitro or in vivo. The transduced eukaryotic cells will express FGF-10.
  • cells are engineered, ex vivo or in vivo, with FGF-10 polynucleotide contained in an adenovirus vector.
  • Adenovirus can be manipulated such that it encodes and expresses FGF-10, and at the same time is inactivated in terms of its ability to replicate in a normal lytic viral life cycle. Adenovirus expression is achieved without integration of the viral DNA into the host cell chromosome, thereby alleviating concerns about insertional mutagenesis.
  • adenoviruses have been used as live enteric vaccines for many years with an excellent safety profile (Schwartz, A. R. et al. (1974) Am. Rev. Respir. Dis.109:233-238).
  • adenovirus mediated gene transfer has been demonstrated in a number of instances including transfer of alpha- 1-antitrypsin and CFTR to the lungs of cotton rats (Rosenfeld, M. A. et al. (1991) Science 252:431-434; Rosenfeld et al., (1992) Cell 68:143-155). Furthermore, extensive studies to attempt to establish adenovirus as a causative agent in human cancer were uniformly negative (Green, M. et al. (1979) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 76:6606).
  • Suitable adenoviral vectors useful in the present invention are described, for example, in Kozarsky and Wilson, Curr. Opin. Genet. Devel. 3:499-503 (1993); Rosenfeld et al., Cell 68:143-155 (1992); Engelhardt et al., Human Genet. Ther. 4:759-769 (1993); Yang et al., Nature Genet. 7:362-369 (1994); Wilson et al., Nature 365:691-692 (1993); and U.S. Patent No. 5,652,224, which are herein incorporated by reference.
  • the adenovirus vector Ad2 is useful and can be grown in human 293 cells.
  • These cells contain the El region of adenovirus and constitutively express Ela and Elb, which complement the defective adenoviruses by providing the products of the genes deleted from the vector.
  • Ad2 other varieties of adenovirus (e.g., Ad3, Ad5, and Ad7) are also useful in the present invention.
  • the adenoviruses used in the present invention are replication deficient.
  • Replication deficient adenoviruses require the aid of a helper virus and/or packaging cell line to form infectious particles.
  • the resulting virus is capable of infecting cells and can express a polynucleotide of interest which is operably linked to a promoter, for example, the HARP promoter of the present invention, but cannot replicate in most cells.
  • Replication deficient adenoviruses may be deleted in one or more of all or a portion of the following genes: Ela, Elb, E3, E4, E2a, or LI through L5.
  • the cells are engineered, ex vivo or in vivo, using an adeno-associated virus (AAV).
  • AAVs are naturally occurring defective viruses that require helper viruses to produce infectious particles (Muzyczka, N . , Curr. Topics in Microbiol. Immunol. 158:97 (1992)). It is also one of the few viruses that may integrate its DNA into non-dividing cells. Vectors containing as little as 300 base pairs of AAV can be packaged and can integrate, but space for exogenous DNA is limited to about 4.5 kb. Methods for producing and using such AAVs are known in the art. See, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,139,941, 5,173,414, 5,354,678, 5,436,146, 5,474,935, 5,478,745, and 5,589,377.
  • an appropriate AAV vector for use in the present invention will include all the sequences necessary for DNA replication, encapsidation, and host-cell integration.
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotide construct is inserted into the AAV vector using standard cloning methods, such as those found in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Press (1989).
  • the recombinant AAV vector is then transfected into packaging cells which are infected with a helper virus, using any standard technique, including lipofection, electroporation, calcium phosphate precipitation, etc.
  • Appropriate helper viruses include adenoviruses, cytomegaloviruses, vaccinia viruses, or herpes viruses.
  • the packaging cells Once the packaging cells are transfected and infected, they will produce infectious AAV viral particles which contain the FGF-10 polynucleotide construct. These viral particles are then used to transduce eukaryotic cells, either ex vivo or in vivo. The transduced cells will contain the FGF-10 polynucleotide construct integrated into its genome, and will express FGF-10.
  • Another method of gene therapy involves operably associating heterologous control regions and endogenous polynucleotide sequences (e.g. encoding FGF-10) via homologous recombination (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 5,641,670, issued June 24, 1997; International Publication No. WO 96/29411, published September 26, 1996; International Publication No. WO 94/12650, published August 4, 1994; Koller et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935 (1989); and Zijlstra et al., Nature 342:435-438 (1989).
  • This method involves the activation of a gene which is present in the target cells, but which is not normally expressed in the cells, or is expressed at a lower level than desired.
  • Polynucleotide constructs are made, using standard techniques known in the art, which contain the promoter with targeting sequences flanking the promoter. Suitable promoters are described herein.
  • the targeting sequence is sufficiently complementary to an endogenous sequence to permit homologous recombination of the promoter-targeting sequence with the endogenous sequence.
  • the targeting sequence will be sufficiently near the 5' end of the FGF-10 desired endogenous polynucleotide sequence so the promoter will be operably linked to the endogenous sequence upon homologous recombination.
  • the promoter and the targeting sequences can be amplified using PCR.
  • the amplified promoter contains distinct restriction enzyme sites on the 5 ' and 3' ends.
  • the 3' end of the first targeting sequence contains the same restriction enzyme site as the 5' end of the amplified promoter and the 5' end of the second targeting sequence contains the same restriction site as the 3' end of the amplified promoter.
  • the amplified promoter and targeting sequences are digested and ligated together.
  • the promoter-targeting sequence construct is delivered to the cells, either as naked polynucleotide, or in conjunction with transfection-facilitating agents, such as liposomes, viral sequences, viral particles, whole viruses, lipofection, precipitating agents, etc., described in more detail above.
  • the P promoter-targeting sequence can be delivered by any method, included direct needle injection, intravenous injection, topical administration, catheter infusion, particle accelerators, etc. The methods are described in more detail below.
  • the promoter-targeting sequence construct is taken up by cells. Homologous recombination between the construct and the endogenous sequence takes place, such that an endogenous FGF-10 sequence is placed under the control of the promoter. The promoter then drives the expression of the endogenous FGF-10 sequence.
  • the polynucleotides encoding FGF-10 may be administered along with other polynucleotides encoding other proteins.
  • proteins include, but are not limited to, acidic and basic fibroblast growth factors, VEGF-1, VEGF-2, VEGF-3, VEGF-E, PIGF 1 and 2, epidermal growth factor alpha and beta, platelet-derived endothelial cell growth factor, platelet-derived growth factor alpha and beta, tumor necrosis factor alpha, hepatocyte growth factor, insulin like growth factor, colony stimulating factor, macrophage colony stimulating factor, granulocyte/macrophage colony stimulating factor, and nitric oxide synthase.
  • the polynucleotide encoding FGF-10 contains a secretory signal sequence that facilitates secretion of the protein.
  • the signal sequence is positioned in the coding region of the polynucleotide to be expressed towards or at the 5' end of the coding region.
  • the signal sequence may be homologous or heterologous to the polynucleotide of interest and may be homologous or heterologous to the cells to be transfected. Additionally, the signal sequence may be chemically synthesized using methods known in the art.
  • any mode of administration of any of the above-described polynucleotides constructs can be used so long as the mode results in the expression of one or more molecules in an amount sufficient to provide a therapeutic effect.
  • This includes direct needle injection, systemic injection, catheter infusion, biolistic injectors, particle accelerators (i.e., "gene guns"), gelfoam sponge depots, other commercially available depot materials, osmotic pumps (e.g., Alza minipumps), oral or suppositorial solid (tablet or pill) pharmaceutical formulations, and decanting or topical applications during surgery.
  • a prefe ⁇ ed method of local administration is by direct injection.
  • a recombinant molecule of the present invention complexed with a delivery vehicle is administered by direct injection into or locally within the area of arteries.
  • Administration of a composition locally within the area of arteries refers to injecting the composition centimeters and preferably, millimeters within arteries.
  • Another method of local administration is to contact a polynucleotide construct of the present invention in or around a surgical wound.
  • a patient can undergo surgery and the polynucleotide construct can be coated on the surface of tissue inside the wound or the construct can be injected into areas of tissue inside the wound.
  • compositions useful in systemic administration include recombinant molecules of the present invention complexed to a targeted delivery vehicle of the present invention.
  • Suitable delivery vehicles for use with systemic administration comprise liposomes comprising ligands for targeting the vehicle to a particular site.
  • Intravenous injections can be performed using methods standard in the art.
  • Aerosol delivery can also be performed using methods standard in the art (see, for example, Stribling et al., Proc. Natl. Acad.
  • Oral delivery can be performed by complexing a polynucleotide construct of the present invention to a carrier capable of withstanding degradation by digestive enzymes in the gut of an animal.
  • a carrier capable of withstanding degradation by digestive enzymes in the gut of an animal.
  • examples of such carriers include plastic capsules or tablets, such as those known in the art.
  • Topical delivery can be performed by mixing a polynucleotide construct of the present invention with a lipophilic reagent (e.g.,
  • DMSO DMSO
  • Determining an effective amount of substance to be delivered can depend upon a number of factors including, for example, the chemical structure and biological activity of the substance, the age and weight of the animal, the precise condition requiring treatment and its severity, and the route of administration.
  • the frequency of treatments depends upon a number of factors, such as the amount of polynucleotide constructs administered per dose, as well as the health and history of the subject. The precise amount, number of doses, and timing of doses will be determined by the attending physician or veterinarian.
  • Therapeutic compositions of the present invention can be administered to any animal, preferably to mammals and birds. Prefened mammals include humans, dogs, cats, mice, rats, rabbits sheep, cattle, horses and pigs, with humans being particularly preferred.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10 can be used in assays to test for one or more biological activities. If FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10, do exhibit activity in a particular assay, it is likely that FGF-10 may be involved in the diseases associated with the biological activity. Therefore, FGF-10 could be used to treat and/or prevent the associated disease.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-
  • Immune cells may be useful in treating and/or preventing deficiencies or disorders of the immune system, by activating or inhibiting the proliferation, differentiation, or mobilization (chemotaxis) of immune cells.
  • Immune cells develop through a process called hematopoiesis, producing myeloid (platelets, red blood cells, neutrophils, and macrophages) and lymphoid (B and T lymphocytes) cells from pluripotent stem cells.
  • the etiology of these immune deficiencies or disorders may be genetic, somatic, such as cancer or some autoimmune disorders, acquired (e.g., by chemotherapy or toxins), or infectious.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 can be used as a marker or detector of a particular immune system disease or disorder.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10 may be useful in treating, preventing, and/or detecting deficiencies or disorders of hematopoietic cells.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 could be used to increase differentiation and proliferation of hematopoietic cells, including the pluripotent stem cells, in an effort to treat and/or prevent those disorders associated with a decrease in certain (or many) types hematopoietic cells.
  • immunologic deficiency syndromes include, but are not limited to: blood protein disorders (e.g.
  • agammaglobulinemia agammaglobulinemia, dysgammaglobulinemia), ataxia telangiectasia, common variable immunodeficiency, Digeorge Syndrome, HIV infection, HTLV-BLV infection, leukocyte adhesion deficiency syndrome, lymphopenia, phagocyte bactericidal dysfunction, severe combined immunodeficiency (SCIDs), Wiskott-Aldrich Disorder, anemia, thrombocytopenia, or hemoglobinuria.
  • SIDs severe combined immunodeficiency
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 can also be used to modulate hemostatic (the stopping of bleeding) or thrombolytic activity (clot formation).
  • hemostatic the stopping of bleeding
  • thrombolytic activity clot formation
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 could be used to treat and/or prevent blood coagulation disorders (e.g., afibrinogenemia, factor deficiencies), blood platelet disorders (e.g. thrombocytopenia), or wounds resulting from trauma, surgery, or other causes.
  • blood coagulation disorders e.g., afibrinogenemia, factor deficiencies
  • blood platelet disorders e.g. thrombocytopenia
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10, that can decrease hemostatic or thrombolytic activity could be used to inhibit or dissolve clotting, important in the treatment and/or prevention of heart attacks (infarction), strokes, or scarring.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10 may also be useful in treating, detecting, and/or preventing autoimmune disorders.
  • Many autoimmune disorders result from inappropriate recognition of self as foreign material by immune cells. This inappropriate recognition results in an immune response leading to the destruction of the host tissue. Therefore, the administration of FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10, that can inhibit an immune response, particularly the proliferation, differentiation, or chemotaxis of T-cells, may be an effective therapy in preventing autoimmune disorders.
  • autoimmune disorders examples include, but are not limited to: Addison's Disease, hemolytic anemia, antiphospholipid syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, dermatitis, allergic encephalomyelitis, glomerulonephritis, Goodpasture's Syndrome, Graves' Disease, Multiple Sclerosis, Myasthenia Gravis, Neuritis, Ophthalmia, Bullous Pemphigoid, Pemphigus, Polyendocrinopathies, Purpura, Reiter's Disease, Stiff-Man Syndrome, Autoimmune Thyroiditis, Systemic Lupus Erythematosus, Autoimmune Pulmonary Inflammation, Guillain-Bane Syndrome, insulin dependent diabetes mellitis, and autoimmune inflammatory eye disease.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 may also be treated and/or prevented by FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10.
  • these molecules can be used to treat and/or prevent anaphylaxis, hypersensitivity to an antigenic molecule, or blood group incompatibility.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10 may also be used to treat and/or prevent organ rejection or graft-versus-host disease (GVHD). Organ rejection occurs by host immune cell destruction of the transplanted tissue through an immune response.
  • GVHD graft-versus-host disease
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 that inhibits an immune response, particularly the proliferation, differentiation, or chemotaxis of T-cells, may be an effective therapy in preventing organ rejection or GVHD.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 may also be used to modulate inflammation.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 may inhibit the proliferation and differentiation of cells involved in an inflammatory response.
  • These molecules can be used to treat and/or prevent inflammatory conditions, both chronic and acute conditions, including inflammation associated with infection (e.g., septic shock, sepsis, or systemic inflammatory response syndrome (SIRS)), ischemia-reperfusion injury, endotoxin lethality, arthritis, complement-mediated hyperacute rejection, nephritis, cytokine or chemokine induced lung injury, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, or resulting from over production of cytokines (e.g., TNF or IL-1.)
  • infection e.g., septic shock, sepsis, or systemic inflammatory response syndrome (SIRS)
  • ischemia-reperfusion injury e.g., endotoxin lethality, arthritis, complement-mediated hyperacute rejection, nephritis, cytokine or chemokine induced lung injury, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, or resulting from over production of cytokines
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10 can be used to treat, detect, and/or prevent hype ⁇ roliferative disorders, including neoplasms.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 may inhibit the proliferation of the disorder through direct or indirect interactions.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 may proliferate other cells which can inhibit the hyperproliferative disorder.
  • hyperproliferative disorders can be treated and/or prevented.
  • This immune response may be increased by either enhancing an existing immune response, or by initiating a new immune response.
  • decreasing an immune response may also be a method of treating and/or preventing hyperproliferative disorders, such as a chemotherapeutic agent.
  • hyperproliferative disorders that can be treated, detected, and/or prevented by FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10, include, but are not limited to neoplasms located in the: abdomen, bone, breast, digestive system, liver, pancreas, peritoneum, endocrine glands (adrenal, parathyroid, pituitary, testicles, ovary, thymus, thyroid), eye, head and neck, nervous (central and peripheral), lymphatic system, pelvic, skin, soft tissue, spleen, thoracic, and urogenital.
  • neoplasms located in the: abdomen, bone, breast, digestive system, liver, pancreas, peritoneum, endocrine glands (adrenal, parathyroid, pituitary, testicles, ovary, thymus, thyroid), eye, head and neck, nervous (central and peripheral), lymphatic system, pelvic, skin, soft tissue,
  • hype ⁇ roliferative disorders can also be treated, detected, and/or prevented by FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10.
  • hype ⁇ roliferative disorders include, but are not limited to: hypergammaglobulinemia, lymphoproliferative disorders, paraproteinemias, purpura, sarcoidosis, Sezary Syndrome, Waldenstron's Macroglobulinemia, Gaucher's Disease, histiocytosis, and any other hyperproliferative disease, besides neoplasia, located in an organ system listed above.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10, encoding FGF-10 may be used to treat and/or prevent cardiovascular disorders, including peripheral artery disease, such as limb ischemia.
  • cardiovascular disorders include cardiovascular abnormalities, such as arterio- arterial fistula, arteriovenous fistula, cerebral arteriovenous malformations, congenital heart defects, pulmonary atresia, and Scimitar Syndrome.
  • Congenital heart defects include aortic coarctation, cor triatriatum, coronary vessel anomalies, crisscross heart, dextrocardia, patent ductus arteriosus, Ebstein's anomaly, Eisenmenger complex, hypoplastic left heart syndrome, levocardia, tetralogy of fallot, transposition of great vessels, double outlet right ventricle, tricuspid atresia, persistent truncus arteriosus, and heart septal defects, such as aortopulmonary septal defect, endocardial cushion defects, Lutembacher's Syndrome, trilogy of Fallot, ventricular heart septal defects.
  • Cardiovascular disorders also include heart disease, such as arrhythmias, carcinoid heart disease, high cardiac output, low cardiac output, cardiac tamponade, endocarditis (including bacterial), heart aneurysm, cardiac arrest, congestive heart failure, congestive cardiomyopathy, paroxysmal dyspnea, cardiac edema, heart hypertrophy, congestive cardiomyopathy, left ventricular hypertrophy, right ventricular hypertrophy, post-infarction heart rupture, ventricular septal rupture, heart valve diseases, myocardial diseases, myocardial ischemia, pericardial effusion, pericarditis (including constrictive and tuberculous), pneumopericardium, postpericardiotomy syndrome, pulmonary heart disease, rheumatic heart disease, ventricular dysfunction, hyperemia, cardiovascular pregnancy complications, Scimitar Syndrome, cardiovascular syphilis, and cardiovascular tuberculosis.
  • heart disease such as arrhythmias, carcinoid heart disease, high cardiac output, low cardiac
  • Arrhythmias include sinus arrhythmia, atrial fibrillation, atrial flutter, bradycardia, extrasystole, Adams-Stokes Syndrome, bundle-branch block, sinoatrial block, long QT syndrome, parasystole, Lown-Ganong-Levine Syndrome, Mahaim- type pre-excitation syndrome, Wolff-Parkinson-White syndrome, sick sinus syndrome, tachycardias, and ventricular fibrillation.
  • Tachycardias include paroxysmal tachycardia, supraventricular tachycardia, accelerated idioventricular rhythm, atrioventricular nodal reentry tachycardia, ectopic atrial tachycardia, ectopic junctional tachycardia, sinoatrial nodal reentry tachycardia, sinus tachycardia, Torsades de Pointes, and ventricular tachycardia.
  • Heart valve disease include aortic valve insufficiency, aortic valve stenosis, hear murmurs, aortic valve prolapse, mitral valve prolapse, tricuspid valve prolapse, mitral valve insufficiency, mitral valve stenosis, pulmonary atresia, pulmonary valve insufficiency, pulmonary valve stenosis, tricuspid atresia, tricuspid valve insufficiency, and tricuspid valve stenosis.
  • Myocardial diseases include alcoholic cardiomyopathy, congestive cardiomyopathy, hypertrophic cardiomyopathy, aortic subvalvular stenosis, pulmonary subvalvular stenosis, restrictive cardiomyopathy, Chagas cardiomyopathy, endocardial fibroelastosis, endomyocardial fibrosis, Kearns Syndrome, myocardial reperfusion injury, and myocarditis.
  • Myocardial ischemias include coronary disease, such as angina pectoris, coronary aneurysm, coronary arteriosclerosis, coronary thrombosis, coronary vasospasm, myocardial infarction and myocardial stunning.
  • coronary disease such as angina pectoris, coronary aneurysm, coronary arteriosclerosis, coronary thrombosis, coronary vasospasm, myocardial infarction and myocardial stunning.
  • Cardiovascular diseases also include vascular diseases such as aneurysms, angiodysplasia, angiomatosis, bacillary angiomatosis, Hippel-Lindau Disease, Klippel-Trenaunay-Weber Syndrome, Sturge-Weber Syndrome, angioneurotic edema, aortic diseases, Takayasu's Arteritis, aortitis, Leriche's Syndrome, arterial occlusive diseases, arteritis, enarteritis, polyarteritis nodosa, cerebrovascular disorders, diabetic angiopathies, diabetic retinopathy, embolisms, thrombosis, erythromelalgia, hemorrhoids, hepatic veno-occlusive disease, hypertension, hypotension, ischemia, peripheral vascular diseases, phlebitis, pulmonary veno- occlusive disease, Raynaud's disease, CREST syndrome, retina
  • Aneurysms include dissecting aneurysms, false aneurysms, infected aneurysms, ruptured aneurysms, aortic aneurysms, cerebral aneurysms, coronary aneurysms, heart aneurysms, and iliac aneurysms.
  • Arterial occlusive diseases include arteriosclerosis, intermittent claudication, carotid stenosis, fibromuscular dysplasias, mesenteric vascular occlusion, Moyamoya disease, renal artery obstruction, retinal artery occlusion, and thromboangiitis obliterans.
  • Cerebrovascular disorders include carotid artery diseases, cerebral amyloid angiopathy, cerebral aneurysm, cerebral anoxia, cerebral arteriosclerosis, cerebral arteriovenous malformation, cerebral artery diseases, cerebral embolism and thrombosis, carotid artery thrombosis, sinus thrombosis, Wallenberg's syndrome, cerebral hemorrhage, epidural hematoma, subdural hematoma, subaraxhnoid hemorrhage, cerebral infarction, cerebral ischemia (including transient), subclavian steal syndrome, periventricular leukomalacia, vascular headache, cluster headache, migraine, and vertebrobasilar insufficiency.
  • Embolisms include air embolisms, amniotic fluid embolisms, cholesterol embolisms, blue toe syndrome, fat embolisms, pulmonary embolisms, and thromoboembolisms.
  • Thrombosis include coronary thrombosis, hepatic vein thrombosis, retinal vein occlusion, carotid artery thrombosis, sinus thrombosis,
  • Ischemia includes cerebral ischemia, ischemic colitis, compartment syndromes, anterior compartment syndrome, myocardial ischemia, reperfusion injuries, and peripheral limb ischemia.
  • Vasculitis includes aortitis, arteritis, Behcet's
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10, are especially effective for the treatment and/or prevention of critical limb ischemia and coronary disease.
  • administration of FGF-10 polynucleotides and polypeptides to an experimentally induced ischemia rabbit hindlimb may restore blood pressure ratio, blood flow, angiographic score, and capillary density.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides may be administered using any method known in the art, including, but not limited to, direct needle injection at the delivery site, intravenous injection, topical administration, catheter infusion, biolistic injectors, particle accelerators, gelfoam sponge depots, other commercially available depot materials, osmotic pumps, oral or suppositorial solid pharmaceutical formulations, decanting or topical applications during surgery, aerosol delivery. Such methods are known in the art.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides may be administered as part of a pharmaceutical composition, described in more detail below. Methods of delivering FGF-10 polynucleotides are described in more detail herein.
  • angiogenesis is stringently regulated and spatially and temporally delimited. Under conditions of pathological angiogenesis such as that characterizing solid tumor growth, these regulatory controls fail. Unregulated angiogenesis becomes pathologic and sustains progression of many neoplastic and non-neoplastic diseases.
  • a number of serious diseases are dominated by abnormal neovascularization including solid tumor growth and metastases, arthritis, some types of eye disorders, and psoriasis. See, e.g., reviews by Moses et al, Biotech. 9:630-634 (1991); Folkman et al., N. Engl. J. Med., 333:1151-1163 (1995); Auerbach et al, J. Microvasc. Res. 29:401-411 (1985); Folkman, Advances in Cancer Research, eds. Klein and Weinhouse, Academic Press, New York, pp. 175-203 (1985); Patz, Am. J.
  • the present invention provides for treatment and/or prevention of diseases or disorders associated with neovascularization by administration of the FGF-10 polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention, as well as agonists or antagonists of FGF-10.
  • Malignant and metastatic conditions which can be treated and/or prevented with the polynucleotides and polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention include, but are not limited to, malignancies, solid tumors, and cancers described herein and otherwise known in the art (for a review of such disorders, see Fishman et al., Medicine, 2d Ed., J. B. Lippincott Co., Philadelphia (1985)):
  • Ocular disorders associated with neovascularization which can be treated and/or prevented with the FGF-10 polynucleotides and polypeptides of the present invention (including FGF-10 agonists and/or antagonists) include, but are not limited to: neovascular glaucoma, diabetic retinopathy, retinoblastoma, retrolental fibroplasia, uveitis, retinopathy of prematurity macular degeneration, corneal graft neovascularization, as well as other eye inflammatory diseases, ocular tumors and diseases associated with choroidal or iris neovascularization. See, e.g., reviews by Waltman et al., Am. J. Ophthal. 85:104-110 (1978) and Gartner et al., Surv. Ophthal. 22:291-312 (1978).
  • disorders which can be treated and/or prevented with the FGF- 10 polynucleotides and polypeptides of the present invention include, but are not limited to, hemangioma, arthritis, psoriasis, angiofibroma, atherosclerotic plaques, delayed wound healing, granulations, hemophilic joints, hypertrophic scars, nonunion fractures, Osier- Weber syndrome, pyogenic granuloma, scleroderma, trachoma, and vascular adhesions.
  • disorders and/or states which can be treated and/or prevented with FGF-10 polynucleotides and polypeptides of the present invention (including FGF-10 agonist and/or antagonists) include, but are not limited to, solid tumors, blood born tumors such as leukemias, tumor metastasis, Kaposi's sarcoma, benign tumors, for example hemangiomas, acoustic neuromas, neurofibromas, trachomas, and pyogenic granulomas, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, ocular angiogenic diseases, for example, diabetic retinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, macular degeneration, corneal graft rejection, neovascular glaucoma, retrolental fibroplasia, rubeosis, retinoblastoma, and uvietis, delayed wound healing, endometriosis, vascluogenesis, granulations, hypertrophic
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides include cancers (such as follicular lymphomas, carcinomas with p53 mutations, and hormone-dependent tumors, including, but not limited to colon cancer, cardiac tumors, pancreatic cancer, melanoma, retinoblastoma, glioblastoma, lung cancer, intestinal cancer, testicular cancer, stomach cancer, neuroblastoma, myxoma, myoma, lymphoma, endothelioma, osteoblastoma, osteoclastoma, osteosarcoma, chondrosarcoma, adenoma, breast cancer, prostate cancer, Kaposi's sarcoma and ovarian cancer); autoimmune disorders (such as, multiple sclerosis, Sjogren's syndrome, Hashimoto's thyroiditis
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides, polypeptides, and/or antagonists of the invention are used to inhibit growth, progression, and/or metasis of cancers, in particular those listed above.
  • Additional diseases or conditions associated with increased cell survival that could be treated, detected, and/or prevented by FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10, include, but are not limited to, progression, and/or metastases of malignancies and related disorders such as leukemia (including acute leukemias (e.g., acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute myelocytic leukemia (including myeloblastic, promyelocytic, myelomonocytic, monocytic, and erythroleukemia)) and chronic leukemias (e.g., chronic myelocytic (granulocytic) leukemia and chronic lymphocytic leukemia)), polycythemia vera, lymphomas (e.g., Hodgkin's disease and non-Hodgkin's disease), multiple myeloma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia, heavy chain disease, and solid tumors including, but not
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides include AIDS; neurodegenerative disorders (such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Retinitis pigmentosa, Cerebellar degeneration and brain tumor or prior associated disease); autoimmune disorders (such as, multiple sclerosis, Sjogren's syndrome, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, biliary cirrhosis, Behcet's disease, Crohn's disease, polymyositis, systemic lupus erythematosus and immune-related glomerulonephritis and rheumatoid arthritis) myelodysplastic syndromes (such as aplastic anemia), graft v.
  • neurodegenerative disorders such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Retinitis pigmentosa, Cerebellar degeneration and brain tumor or prior associated disease
  • autoimmune disorders such as, multiple sclerosis, Sjogren
  • ischemic injury such as that caused by myocardial infarction, stroke and reperfusion injury
  • liver injury e.g., hepatitis related liver injury, ischemia reperfusion injury, cholestosis (bile duct injury) and liver cancer
  • toxin-induced liver disease such as that caused by alcohol
  • septic shock cachexia and anorexia.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides as well as agonists or antagonists of FGF-10, for therapeutic purposes, for example, to stimulate epithelial cell proliferation and basal keratinocytes for the purpose of wound healing, and to stimulate hair follicle production and healing of dermal wounds.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides may be clinically useful in stimulating wound healing including surgical wounds, excisional wounds, deep wounds involving damage of the dermis and epidermis, eye tissue wounds, dental tissue wounds, oral cavity wounds, diabetic ulcers, dermal ulcers, cubitus ulcers, arterial ulcers, venous stasis ulcers, burns resulting from heat exposure or chemicals, and other abnormal wound healing conditions such as uremia, malnutrition, vitamin deficiencies and complications associted with systemic treatment with steroids, radiation therapy and antineoplastic drugs and antimetabolites.
  • wound healing including surgical wounds, excisional wounds, deep wounds involving damage of the dermis and epidermis, eye tissue wounds, dental tissue wounds, oral cavity wounds, diabetic ulcers, dermal ulcers, cubitus ulcers, arterial ulcers, venous stasis ulcers, burns resulting from heat exposure or chemicals, and other abnormal wound healing conditions such as uremia, malnutrition, vitamin deficiencies and
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides could be used to promote dermal reestablishment subsequent to dermal loss
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides could be used to increase the adherence of skin grafts to a wound bed and to stimulate re-epithelialization from the wound bed.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 could be used to increase adherence to a wound bed: autografts, artificial skin, allografts, autodermic graft, autoepdermic grafts, avacular grafts, Blair-Brown grafts, bone graft, brephoplastic grafts, cutis graft, delayed graft, dermic graft, epidermic graft, fascia graft, full thickness graft, heterologous graft, xenograft, homologous graft, hyperplastic graft, lamellar graft, mesh graft, mucosal graft, Ollier-Thiersch graft, omenpal graft, patch graft, pedicle graft, penetrating graft, split skin graft, thick split graft.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides will also produce changes in hepatocyte proliferation, and epithelial cell proliferation in the lung, breast, pancreas, stomach, small intesting, and large intestine.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 could promote proliferation of epithelial cells such as sebocytes, hair follicles, hepatocytes, type II pneumocytes, mucin-producing goblet cells, and other epithelial cells and their progenitors contained within the skin, lung, liver, and gastrointestinal tract.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 may promote proliferation of endothelial cells, keratinocytes, and basal keratinocytes.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides could also be used to reduce the side effects of gut toxicity that result from radiation, chemotherapy treatments or viral infections.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 may have a cytoprotective effect on the small intestine mucosa.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 may also stimulate healing of mucositis (mouth ulcers) that result from chemotherapy and viral infections.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides could further be used in full regeneration of skin in full and partial thickness skin defects, including burns, (i.e., repopulation of hair follicles, sweat glands, and sebaceous glands), treatment and/or prevention of other skin defects such as psoriasis.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides could be used to treat and/or prevent epidermolysis bullosa, a defect in adherence of the epidermis to the underlying dermis which results in frequent, open and painful blisters by accelerating reepithelialization of these lesions.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 could also be used to treat and/or prevent gastric and doudenal ulcers and help heal by scar formation of the mucosal lining and regeneration of glandular mucosa and duodenal mucosal lining more rapidly.
  • Inflamamatory bowel diseases such as Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis, are diseases which result in destruction of the mucosal surface of the small or large intestine, respectively.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 could be used to promote the resurfacing of the mucosal surface to aid more rapid healing and to prevent progression of inflammatory bowel disease.
  • Treatment with FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 is expected to have a significant effect on the production of mucus throughout the gastrointestinal tract and could be used to protect the intestinal mucosa from injurious substances that are ingested or following surgery.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 could be used to treat and/or prevent diseases associate with the under expression of FGF- 10.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides could be used to prevent and heal damage to the lungs due to various pathological states.
  • a growth factor such as FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of FGF-10, which could stimulate proliferation and differentiation and promote the repair of alveoli and brochiolar epithelium to prevent or treat acute or chronic lung damage.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides agonists or antagonists of FGF-10.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 could be used to stimulate the proliferation of and differentiation of type II pneumocytes, which may help treat or prevent disease such as hyaline membrane diseases, such as infant respiratory distress syndrome and bronchopulmonary displasia, in premature infants.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides could stimulate the proliferation and differentiation of hepatocytes and, thus, could be used to prevent, alleviate, and/or treat liver diseases and pathologies such as fulminant liver failure caused by cirrhosis, liver damage caused by viral hepatitis and toxic substances (i.e., acetaminophen, carbon tetraholoride and other hepatotoxins known in the art).
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 could be used treat and/or prevent the onset of diabetes mellitus.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 could be used to maintain the islet function so as to alleviate, delay and/or prevent permanent manifestation of the disease.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 could be used as an auxiliary in islet cell transplantation to improve or promote islet cell function.
  • Nervous system diseases, disorders, and/or conditions which can be treated and/or prevented with the FGF-10 compositions of the invention (e.g., FGF-10 polypeptides, polynucleotides, and/or agonists or antagonists), include, but are not limited to, nervous system injuries, and diseases, disorders, and/or conditions which result in either a disconnection of axons, a diminution or degeneration of neurons, or demyelination.
  • FGF-10 compositions of the invention include, but are not limited to, nervous system injuries, and diseases, disorders, and/or conditions which result in either a disconnection of axons, a diminution or degeneration of neurons, or demyelination.
  • Nervous system lesions which may be treated and/or prevented in a patient (including human and non-human mammalian patients) according to the invention, include but are not limited to, the following lesions of either the central (including spinal cord, brain) or peripheral nervous systems: (1) ischemic lesions, in which a lack of oxygen in a portion of the nervous system results in neuronal injury or death, including cerebral infarction or ischemia, or spinal cord infarction or ischemia; (2) traumatic lesions, including lesions caused by physical injury or associated with surgery, for example, lesions which sever a portion of the nervous system, or compression injuries; (3) malignant lesions, in which a portion of the nervous system is destroyed or injured by malignant tissue which is either a nervous system associated malignancy or a malignancy derived from non-nervous system tissue; (4) infectious lesions, in which a portion of the nervous system is destroyed or injured as a result of infection, for example, by an abscess or associated with infection by human immunodeficiency virus, herpes
  • the FGF-10 polypeptides, polynucleotides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention are used to protect neural cells from the damaging effects of cerebral hypoxia.
  • the FGF-10 compositions of the invention are used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose neural cell injury associated with cerebral hypoxia.
  • the FGF- 10 polypeptides, polynucleotides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention are used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose neural cell injury associated with cerebral ischemia.
  • the FGF-10 polypeptides, polynucleotides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention are used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose neural cell injury associated with cerebral infarction.
  • the FGF-10 polypeptides, polynucleotides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention are used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose neural cell injury associated with a stroke.
  • the FGF-10 polypeptides, polynucleotides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention are used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose neural cell injury associated with a heart attack.
  • compositions of the invention which are useful for treating, preventing, and/or diagnosing a nervous system disorder may be selected by testing for biological activity in promoting the survival or differentiation of neurons.
  • FGF-10 compositions of the invention which elicit any of the following effects may be useful according to the invention: (1) increased survival time of neurons in culture; (2) increased sprouting of neurons in culture or in vivo; (3) increased production of a neuron-associated molecule in culture or in vivo, e.g., choline acetyltransferase or acetylcholinesterase with respect to motor neurons; or (4) decreased symptoms of neuron dysfunction in vivo.
  • Such effects may be measured by any method known in the art.
  • increased survival of neurons may routinely be measured using a method set forth herein or otherwise known in the art, such as, for example, the method set forth in Arakawa et al. (J. Neurosci. 10:3507-3515 (1990)); increased sprouting of neurons may be detected by methods known in the art, such as, for example, the methods set forth in Pestronk et al. (Exp. Neurol. 70:65-82 (1980)) or Brown et al. (Ann. Rev. Neurosci.
  • neuron-associated molecules may be measured by bioassay, enzymatic assay, antibody binding, Northern blot assay, etc., using techniques known in the art and depending on the molecule to be measured; and motor neuron dysfunction may be measured by assessing the physical manifestation of motor neuron disorder, e.g., weakness, motor neuron conduction velocity, or functional disability.
  • motor neuron diseases, disorders, and/or conditions that may be treated and/or prevent according to the invention include, but are not limited to, diseases, disorders, and/or conditions such as infarction, infection, exposure to toxin, trauma, surgical damage, degenerative disease or malignancy that may affect motor neurons as well as other components of the nervous system, as well as diseases, disorders, and/or conditions that selectively affect neurons such as amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, and including, but not limited to, progressive spinal muscular atrophy, progressive bulbar palsy, primary lateral sclerosis, infantile and juvenile muscular atrophy, progressive bulbar paralysis of childhood (Fazio-Londe syndrome), poliomyelitis and the post polio syndrome, and Hereditary Motorsensory Neuropathy (Charcot-Marie-Tooth Disease).
  • diseases, disorders, and/or conditions such as infarction, infection, exposure to toxin, trauma, surgical damage, degenerative disease or malignancy that may affect motor neurons as well as other components of the nervous system, as well as diseases, disorders,
  • neurologic diseases which can be treated, prevented, and/or diagnosed with polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists, and/or antagonists of the present invention include brain diseases, such as metabolic brain diseases which includes phenylketonuria such as maternal phenylketonuria, pyruvate carboxylase deficiency, pyruvate dehydrogenase complex deficiency, Wernicke's Encephalopathy, brain edema, brain neoplasms such as cerebellar neoplasms which include infratentorial neoplasms, cerebral ventricle neoplasms such as choroid plexus neoplasms, hypothalamic neoplasms, supratentorial neoplasms, canavan disease, cerebellar diseases such as cerebellar ataxia which include spinocerebellar degeneration such as ataxia telangiectasia, cerebellar dyssynergia, Friederich's
  • epilepsy such as generalized epilepsy which includes infantile spasms, absence epilepsy, myoclonic epilepsy which includes MERRF Syndrome, tonic-clonic epilepsy, partial epilepsy such as complex partial epilepsy, frontal lobe epilepsy and temporal lobe epilepsy, post-traumatic epilepsy, status epilepticus such as Epilepsia Partialis Continua, Hallervorden-Spatz Syndrome, hydrocephalus such as Dandy-Walker Syndrome and normal pressure hydrocephalus, hypothalamic diseases such as hypothalamic neoplasms, cerebral malaria, n
  • Bacterial meningtitis which includes Haemophilus Meningtitis, Listeria Meningtitis, Meningococcal Meningtitis such as Waterhouse-Friderichsen Syndrome, Pneumococcal Meningtitis and meningeal tuberculosis, fungal meningitis such as Cryptococcal Meningtitis, subdural effusion, meningoencephalitis such as uvemeningoencephalitic syndrome, myelitis such as transverse myelitis, neurosyphilis such as tabes dorsalis, poliomyelitis which includes bulbar poliomyelitis and postpoliomyelitis syndrome, prion diseases (such as Creutzfeldt-Jakob Syndrome, Bovine Spongiform Encephalopathy, Gerstmann-Straussler Syndrome, Kuru, Scrapie) cerebral toxoplasmosis, central nervous system neoplasms such as brain neoplasms that include cerebellear neoplasms such
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10 can be used to detect, prevent, and/or treat infectious agents. For example, by increasing the immune response, particularly increasing the proliferation and differentiation of B and/or T cells, infectious diseases may be treated and/or prevented. The immune response may be increased by either enhancing an existing immune response, or by initiating a new immune response. Alternatively, FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10, may also directly inhibit the infectious agent, without necessarily eliciting an immune response.
  • viruses are one example of an infectious agent that can cause disease or symptoms that can be detected, treated, and/or prevented by FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10.
  • viruses include, but are not limited to the following DNA and RNA viral families: Arbovirus, Adenoviridae, Arenaviridae, Arterivirus, Birnaviridae, Bunyaviridae, Caliciviridae, Circoviridae, Coronaviridae, Flaviviridae, Hepadnaviridae (Hepatitis), Herpesviridae (such as, Cytomegalovirus, Herpes Simplex, Herpes Zoster), Mononegavirus (e.g., Paramyxoviridae, Morbillivirus, Rhabdoviridae), Orthomyxoviridae (e.g., Influenza), Papovaviridae, Parvoviridae, Picornaviridae, Pox
  • Viruses falling within these families can cause a variety of diseases or symptoms, including, but not limited to: arthritis, bronchiollitis, encephalitis, eye infections (e.g., conjunctivitis, keratitis), chronic fatigue syndrome, hepatitis (A, B, C, E, Chronic Active, Delta), meningitis, opportunistic infections (e.g., AIDS), pneumonia, Burkitt's Lymphoma, chickenpox , hemorrhagic fever, Measles, Mumps, Parainfluenza, Rabies, the common cold, Polio, leukemia, Rubella, sexually transmitted diseases, skin diseases (e.g., Kaposi's, warts), and viremia.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 can be used to detect, prevent, and/or treat any of these symptoms or diseases.
  • bacterial or fungal agents that can cause disease or symptoms and that can be detected, prevented, and/or treated by FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10, include, but not limited to, the following Gram-Negative and Gram-positive bacterial families and fungi: Actinomycetales (e.g., Corynebacterium, Mycobacterium, Norcardia), Aspergillosis, Bacillaceae (e.g., Anthrax, Clostridium), Bacteroidaceae, Blastomycosis, Bordetella, Borrelia, Brucellosis, Candidiasis, Campylobacter, Coccidioidomycosis, Cryptococcosis, Dermatocycoses, Enterobacteriaceae (Klebsiella, Salmonella, Serratia, Yersinia), Erysipelothrix, Helicobacter, Legionellosis, Leptospi
  • bacterial or fungal families can cause the following diseases or symptoms, including, but not limited to: bacteremia, endocarditis, eye infections (conjunctivitis, tuberculosis, uveitis), gingivitis, opportunistic infections (e.g., AIDS related infections), paronychia, prosthesis-related infections, Reiter's Disease, respiratory tract infections, such as Whooping Cough or Empyema, sepsis, Lyme Disease, Cat-Scratch Disease, Dysentery, Paratyphoid Fever, food poisoning, Typhoid, pneumonia, Gonorrhea, meningitis, Chlamydia, Syphilis, Diphtheria, Leprosy, Paratuberculosis, Tuberculosis, Lupus, Botulism, gangrene, tetanus, impetigo, Rheumatic Fever, Scarlet Fever, sexually transmitted diseases, skin diseases (e.g., cellu
  • parasitic agents causing disease or symptoms that can be detected, prevented, and/or treated by FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 include, but not limited to, the following families: Amebiasis, Babesiosis, Coccidiosis, Cryptosporidiosis, Dientamoebiasis, Dourine, Ectoparasitic, Giardiasis, Helminthiasis, Leishmaniasis, Theileriasis, Toxoplasmosis, Trypanosomiasis, and Trichomonas.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 can be used to detect, prevent and/or treat any of these symptoms or diseases.
  • detection, prevention and/or treatment using FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 could either be by administering an effective amount of FGF-10 polypeptide to the patient, or by removing cells from the patient, supplying the cells with FGF-10 polynucleotide, and returning the engineered cells to the patient (ex vivo therapy).
  • the FGF-10 polypeptide or polynucleotide can be used as an antigen in a vaccine to raise an immune response against infectious disease.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10 can be used to differentiate, proliferate, and attract cells, leading to the regeneration of tissues.
  • the regeneration of tissues could be used to repair, replace, or protect tissue damaged by congenital defects, trauma (wounds, burns, incisions, or ulcers), age, disease (e.g. osteoporosis, osteocarthritis, periodontal disease, liver failure), surgery, including cosmetic plastic surgery, fibrosis, reperfusion injury, or systemic cytokine damage.
  • Tissues that could be regenerated using the present invention include organs
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 may increase regeneration of tissues difficult to heal. For example, increased tendon/ligament regeneration would quicken recovery time after damage.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10, of the present invention could also be used prophylactically in an effort to avoid damage.
  • Specific diseases that could be prevented, and/or treated include of tendinitis, carpal tunnel syndrome, and other tendon or ligament defects.
  • tissue regeneration of non-healing wounds includes pressure ulcers, ulcers associated with vascular insufficiency, surgical, and traumatic wounds.
  • nerve and brain tissue could also be regenerated by using FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10, to proliferate and differentiate nerve cells.
  • Diseases that could be prevented and/or treated using this method include central and peripheral nervous system diseases, neuropathies, or mechanical and traumatic disorders (e.g., spinal cord disorders, head trauma, cerebrovascular disease, and stoke).
  • diseases associated with peripheral nerve injuries, peripheral neuropathy (e.g., resulting from chemotherapy or other medical therapies), localized neuropathies, and central nervous system diseases (e.g., Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, and Shy-Drager syndrome) could all be prevented and/or treated using the FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10, may have chemotaxis activity.
  • a chemotaxic molecule attracts or mobilizes cells (e.g., monocytes, fibroblasts, neutrophils, T-cells, mast cells, eosinophils, epithelial and/or endothelial cells) to a particular site in the body, such as inflammation, infection, or site of hyperproliferation.
  • the mobilized cells can then fight off and/or heal the particular trauma or abnormality.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10, may increase chemotaxic activity of particular cells.
  • These chemotactic molecules can then be used to treat and/or prevent inflammation, infection, hype ⁇ roliferative disorders, or any immune system disorder by increasing the number of cells targeted to a particular location in the body.
  • chemotaxic molecules can be used to treat wounds and other trauma to tissues by attracting immune cells to the injured location.
  • FGF-10 could also attract fibroblasts, which can be used to treat wounds.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 may inhibit chemotactic activity. These molecules could also be used to treat and/or prevent disorders. Thus, FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10, could be used as an inhibitor of chemotaxis.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides may be used to screen for molecules that bind to FGF- 10 or for molecules to which FGF-10 binds.
  • the binding of FGF-10 and the molecule may activate (agonist), increase, inhibit (antagonist), or decrease activity of the FGF-10 or the molecule bound.
  • Examples of such molecules include antibodies, oligonucleotides, proteins (e.g., receptors),or small molecules.
  • the molecule is closely related to the natural ligand of FGF-10, e.g., a fragment of the ligand, or a natural substrate, a ligand, a structural or functional mimetic.
  • the molecule can be closely related to the natural receptor to which FGF-10 binds, or at least, a fragment of the receptor capable of being bound by FGF-10 (e.g., active site).
  • the molecule can be rationally designed using known techniques.
  • the screening for these molecules involves producing appropriate cells which express FGF-10, either as a secreted protein or on the cell membrane.
  • Preferred cells include cells from mammals, yeast, Drosophila, or E. coli.
  • Cells expressing FGF-10(or cell membrane containing the expressed polypeptide) are then preferably contacted with a test compound potentially containing the molecule to observe binding, stimulation, or inhibition of activity of either FGF-10 or the molecule.
  • the assay may simply test binding of a candidate compound to FGF-10, wherein binding is detected by a label, or in an assay involving competition with a labeled competitor. Further, the assay may test whether the candidate compound results in a signal generated by binding to FGF-10.
  • the assay can be canied out using cell-free preparations, polypeptide/molecule affixed to a solid support, chemical libraries, or natural product mixtures.
  • the assay may also simply comprise the steps of mixing a candidate compound with a solution containing FGF-10, measuring FGF-10/moIecule activity or binding, and comparing the FGF-10/molecule activity or binding to a standard.
  • an ELISA assay can measure FGF-10 level or activity in a sample (e.g., biological sample) using a monoclonal or polyclonal antibody.
  • the antibody can measure FGF-10 level or activity by either binding, directly or indirectly, to FGF- 10 or by competing with FGF-10 for a substrate.
  • the receptor to which FGF-10 binds can be identified by numerous methods known to those of skill in the art, for example, ligand panning and FACS sorting (Coligan, et al., Current Protocols in Immun., 1(2), Chapter 5 , (1991)).
  • expression cloning is employed wherein polyadenylated RNA is prepared from a cell responsive to the polypeptides, for example, NIH3T3 cells which are known to contain multiple receptors for the FGF family proteins, and SC-3 cells, and a cDNA library created from this RNA is divided into pools and used to transfect COS cells or other cells that are not responsive to the polypeptides.
  • Transfected cells which are grown on glass slides are exposed to the polypeptide of the present invention, after they have been labelled.
  • the polypeptides can be labeled by a variety of means including iodination or inclusion of a recognition site for a site- specific protein kinase.
  • the labeled polypeptides can be photoaffinity linked with cell membrane or extract preparations that express the receptor molecule. Cross-linked material is resolved by PAGE analysis and exposed to X-ray film. The labeled complex containing the receptors of the polypeptides can be excised, resolved into peptide fragments, and subjected to protein microsequencing. The amino acid sequence obtained from microsequencing would be used to design a set of degenerate oligonucleotide probes to screen a cDNA library to identify the genes encoding the putative receptors.
  • this invention provides a method of screening compounds to identify those which modulate the action of the polypeptide of the present invention.
  • An example of such an assay comprises combining a mammalian fibroblast cell, a the polypeptide of the present invention, the compound to be screened and 3 [HI thymidine under cell culture conditions where the fibroblast cell would normally proliferate.
  • a control assay may be performed in the absence of the compound to be screened and compared to the amount of fibroblast proliferation in the presence of the compound to determine if the compound stimulates proliferation by determining the uptake of 3[H] thymidine in each case.
  • the amount of fibroblast cell proliferation is measured by liquid scintillation chromatography which measures the incorporation of [H] thymidine.
  • Both agonist and antagonist compounds may be identified by this procedure.
  • a mammalian cell or membrane preparation expressing a receptor for a polypeptide of the present invention is incubated with a labeled polypeptide of the present invention in the presence of the compound. The ability of the compound to enhance or block this interaction could then be measured.
  • the response of a known second messenger system following interaction of a compound to be screened and the FGF-10 receptor is measured and the ability of the compound to bind to the receptor and elicit a second messenger response is measured to determine if the compound is a potential agonist or antagonist.
  • Such second messenger systems include but are not limited to, cAMP guanylate cyclase, ion channels or phosphoinositide hydrolysis. All of these above assays can be used as diagnostic or prognostic markers.
  • the molecules discovered using these assays can be used to treat and/or prevent disease or to bring about a particular result in a patient (e.g., blood vessel growth) by activating or inhibiting the FGF-10/molecule.
  • the assays can discover agents which may inhibit or enhance the production of FGF-10 from suitably manipulated cells or tissues. Therefore, the invention includes a method of identifying compounds which bind to FGF-10 comprising the steps of: (a) incubating a candidate binding compound with FGF-10; and (b) determining if binding has occurred.
  • the invention includes a method of identifying agonists/antagonists comprising the steps of: (a) incubating a candidate compound with FGF-10, (b) assaying a biological activity , and (b) determining if a biological activity of FGF-10 has been altered.
  • Additional embodiments of the invention are directed to polynucleotides encoding FGF-10 polypeptides which comprise, or alternatively consist of, any combination or all of the beta pleated sheet regions disclosed in Figure 3/Table 1.
  • Additional preferred embodiments of the invention are directed to polypeptides which comprise, or alternatively consist of, the FGF-10 amino acid sequence of each of the beta pleated sheet regions disclosed in Figure 3/Table 1.
  • Additional embodiments of the invention are directed to FGF-10 polypeptides which comprise, or alternatively consist of, any combination or all of the beta pleated sheet regions disclosed in Figure 3/Table 1.
  • the invention provides a method of delivering compositions to targeted cells expressing a receptor for a polypeptide of the invention, or cells expressing a cell bound form of a polypeptide of the invention.
  • polypeptides or antibodies of the invention may be associated with heterologous polypeptides, heterologous nucleic acids, toxins, or prodrugs via hydrophobic, hydrophilic, ionic and/or covalent interactions.
  • the invention provides a method for the specific delivery of compositions of the invention to cells by administering polypeptides of the invention (including antibodies) that are associated with heterologous polypeptides or nucleic acids.
  • the invention provides a method for delivering a therapeutic protein into the targeted cell.
  • the invention provides a method for delivering a single stranded nucleic acid (e.g., antisense or ribozymes) or double stranded nucleic acid (e.g., DNA that can integrate into the cell's genome or replicate episomally and that can be transcribed) into the targeted cell.
  • a single stranded nucleic acid e.g., antisense or ribozymes
  • double stranded nucleic acid e.g., DNA that can integrate into the cell's genome or replicate episomally and that can be transcribed
  • the invention provides a method for the specific destruction of cells (e.g., the destruction of tumor cells) by administering polypeptides of the invention (e.g., polypeptides of the invention or antibodies of the invention) in association with toxins or cytotoxic prodrugs.
  • toxins is meant compounds that bind and activate endogenous cytotoxic effector systems, radioisotopes, holotoxins, modified toxins, catalytic subunits of toxins, or any molecules or enzymes not normally present in or on the surface of a cell that under defined conditions cause the cell's death.
  • Toxins that may be used according to the methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, radioisotopes known in the art, compounds such as, for example, antibodies (or complement fixing containing portions thereof) that bind an inherent or induced endogenous cytotoxic effector system, thymidine kinase, endonuclease, RNAse, alpha toxin, ricin, abrin, Pseudomonas exotoxin A, diphtheria toxin, saporin, momordin, gelonin, pokeweed antiviral protein, alpha-sarcin and cholera toxin.
  • radioisotopes known in the art
  • compounds such as, for example, antibodies (or complement fixing containing portions thereof) that bind an inherent or induced endogenous cytotoxic effector system, thymidine kinase, endonuclease, RNAse, alpha toxin, ricin, abrin, Pseu
  • cytotoxic prodrug is meant a non-toxic compound that is converted by an enzyme, normally present in the cell, into a cytotoxic compound.
  • Cytotoxic prodrugs that may be used according to the methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, glutamyl derivatives of benzoic acid mustard alkylating agent, phosphate derivatives of etoposide or mitomycin C, cytosine arabinoside, daunorubisin, and phenoxyacetamide derivatives of doxorubicin.
  • polypeptides of the present invention or the polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides, to screen for molecules which modify the activities of the polypeptides of the present invention.
  • a method would include contacting the polypeptide of the present invention with a selected compound(s) suspected of having antagonist or agonist activity, and assaying the activity of these polypeptides following binding.
  • This invention is particularly useful for screening therapeutic compounds by using the polypeptides of the present invention, or binding fragments thereof, in any of a variety of drug screening techniques.
  • the polypeptide or fragment employed in such a test may be affixed to a solid support, expressed on a cell surface, free in solution, or located intracellularly.
  • One method of drug screening utilizes eukaryotic or prokaryotic host cells which are stably transformed with recombinant nucleic acids expressing the polypeptide or fragment. Drugs are screened against such transformed cells in competitive binding assays.
  • One may measure, for example, the formulation of complexes between the agent being tested and a polypeptide of the present invention.
  • the present invention provides methods of screening for drugs or any other agents which affect activities mediated by the polypeptides of the present invention. These methods comprise contacting such an agent with a polypeptide of the present invention or a fragment thereof and assaying for the presence of a complex between the agent and the polypeptide or a fragment thereof, by methods well known in the art.
  • the agents to screen are typically labeled. Following incubation, free agent is separated from that present in bound form, and the amount of free or uncomplexed label is a measure of the ability of a particular agent to bind to the polypeptides of the present invention.
  • Another technique for drug screening provides high throughput screening for compounds having suitable binding affinity to the polypeptides of the present invention, and is described in great detail in European Patent Application 84/03564, published on September 13, 1984, which is incorporated herein by reference herein. Briefly stated, large numbers of different small peptide test compounds are synthesized on a solid substrate, such as plastic pins or some other surface. The peptide test compounds are reacted with polypeptides of the present invention and washed. Bound polypeptides are then detected by methods well known in the art. Purified polypeptides are coated directly onto plates for use in the aforementioned drug screening techniques. In addition, non-neutralizing antibodies may be used to capture the peptide and immobilize it on the solid support.
  • This invention also contemplates the use of competitive drug screening assays in which neutralizing antibodies capable of binding polypeptides of the present invention specifically compete with a test compound for binding to the polypeptides or fragments thereof. In this manner, the antibodies are used to detect the presence of any peptide which shares one or more antigenic epitopes with a polypeptide of the invention.
  • antagonists according to the present invention are nucleic acids conesponding to the sequences contained in SEQ ID NO: l , or the complementary strand thereof, and/or to nucleotide sequences contained in the deposited clone 75696.
  • antisense sequence is generated internally by the organism, in another embodiment, the antisense sequence is separately administered (see, for example, O'Connor, J., Neurochem. 56:560 (1991). Oligodeoxynucleotides as Anitsense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL (1988).
  • Antisense technology can be used to control gene expression through antisense DNA or RNA, or through triple-helix formation.
  • Antisense techniques are discussed for example, in Okano, J., Neurochem. 56:560 (1991); Oligodeoxynucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL (1988).
  • Triple helix formation is discussed in, for instance, Lee et al., Nucleic Acids Research 10-1573 (1979); Cooney et al., Science 241:456 (1988); and Dervan et al., Science 251: 1300 (1991).
  • the methods are based on binding of a polynucleotide to a complementary DNA or RNA.
  • the 5' coding portion of a polynucleotide that encodes the mature polypeptide of the present invention may be used to design an antisense RNA oligonucleotide of from about 10 to 40 base pairs in length.
  • a DNA oligonucleotide is designed to be complementary to a region of the gene involved in transcription thereby preventing transcription and the production of the receptor.
  • the antisense RNA oligonucleotide hybridizes to the mRNA in vivo and blocks translation of the mRNA molecule into receptor polypeptide.
  • the FGF-10 antisense nucleic acid of the invention is produced intracellularly by transcription from an exogenous sequence.
  • RNA antisense nucleic acid
  • a vector or a portion thereof is transcribed, producing an antisense nucleic acid (RNA) of the invention.
  • a vector would contain a sequence encoding the FGF- 10 antisense nucleic acid.
  • Such a vector can remain episomal or become chromosomally integrated, as long as it can be transcribed to produce the desired antisense RNA.
  • Such vectors can be constructed by recombinant DNA technology methods standard in the art.
  • Vectors can be plasmid, viral, or others know in the art, used for replication and expression in vertebrate cells. Expression of the sequence encoding FGF-10, or fragments thereof, can be by any promoter known in the art to act in vertebrate, preferably human cells.
  • Such promoters can be inducible or constitutive.
  • Such promoters include, but are not limited to, the SV40 early promoter region (Bernoist and Chambon, Nature 29:304-310 (1981), the promoter contained in the 3' long terminal repeat of Rous sarcoma virus Qfamamoto et al., Cell 22:787-797 (1980), the herpes thymidine promoter (Wagner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 78:1441-1445 (1981), the regulatory sequences of the metallothionein gene (Brinster, et al., Nature 296:39-42 (1982)), etc.
  • the antisense nucleic acids of the invention comprise a sequence complementary to at least a portion of an RNA transcript of a FGF-10 gene.
  • absolute complementarity although preferred, is not required.
  • the ability to hybridize will depend on both the degree of complementarity and the length of the antisense nucleic acid Generally, the larger the hybridizing nucleic acid, the more base mismatches with a FGF-10 RNA it may contain and still form a stable duplex (or triplex as the case may be).
  • One skilled in the art can ascertain a tolerable degree of mismatch by use of standard procedures to determine the melting point of the hybridized complex.
  • Oligonucleotides that are complementary to the 5' end of the message should work most efficiently at inhibiting translation.
  • sequences complementary to the 3' untranslated sequences of mRNAs have been shown to be effective at inhibiting translation of mRNAs as well. See generally, Wagner, R., 1994, Nature 372:333- 335.
  • oligonucleotides complementary to either the 5'- or 3'- non- translated, non-coding regions of FGF-10 shown in Figures 1A-B could be used in an antisense approach to inhibit translation of endogenous FGF-10 mRNA.
  • Oligonucleotides complementary to the 5' untranslated region of the mRNA should include the complement of the AUG start codon.
  • Antisense oligonucleotides complementary to mRNA coding regions are less efficient inhibitors of translation but could be used in accordance with the invention.
  • antisense nucleic acids should be at least six nucleotides in length, and are preferably oligonucleotides ranging from 6 to about 50 nucleotides in length. In specific aspects the oligonucleotide is at least 10 nucleotides, at least 17 nucleotides, at least 25 nucleotides or at least 50 nucleotides.
  • the polynucleotides of the invention can be DNA or RNA or chimeric mixtures or derivatives or modified versions thereof, single-stranded or double- stranded.
  • the oligonucleotide can be modified at the base moiety, sugar moiety, or phosphate backbone, for example, to improve stability of the molecule, hybridization, etc.
  • the oligonucleotide may include other appended groups such as peptides (e.g., for targeting host cell receptors in vivo), or agents facilitating transport across the cell membrane (see, e.g., Letsinger et al., 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.
  • the oligonucleotide may be conjugated to another molecule, e.g., a peptide, hybridization triggered cross-linking agent, transport agent, hybridization-triggered cleavage agent, etc.
  • the antisense oligonucleotide may comprise at least one modified base moiety which is selected from the group including, but not limited to, 5-fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-chlorouracil, 5-iodouracil, hypoxanthine, xantine, 4-acetylcytosine, 5-(carboxyhydroxylmethyl) uracil, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil, beta-D-galactosylqueosine, inosine, N6-isopentenyladenine, 1 -methyl guanine, 1-methylinosine,
  • the antisense oligonucleotide may also comprise at least one modified sugar moiety selected from the group including, but not limited to, arabinose,
  • the antisense oligonucleotide comprises at least one modified phosphate backbone selected from the group including, but not limited to, a phosphorothioate, a phosphorodithioate, a phosphoramidothioate, a phosphoramidate, a phosphordiamidate, a methylphosphonate, an alkyl phosphotriester, and a formacetal or analog thereof.
  • the antisense oligonucleotide is an a-anomeric oligonucleotide.
  • An a-anomeric oligonucleotide forms specific double-stranded hybrids with complementary RNA in which, contrary to the usual b-units, the strands run parallel to each other (Gautier et al., 1987, Nucl. Acids Res. 15:6625-6641).
  • the oligonucleotide is a 2'-0-methylribonucleotide (Inoue et al., 1987, Nucl. Acids Res.
  • Polynucleotides of the invention may be synthesized by standard methods known in the art, e.g. by use of an automated DNA synthesizer (such as are commercially available from Biosearch, Applied Biosystems, etc.).
  • an automated DNA synthesizer such as are commercially available from Biosearch, Applied Biosystems, etc.
  • phosphorothioate oligonucleotides may be synthesized by the method of Stein et al.
  • methylphosphonate oligonucleotides can be prepared by use of controlled pore glass polymer supports (Sarin et al., 1988, Proc.
  • antisense nucleotides complementary to the FGF-10 coding region sequence could be used, those complementary to the transcribed untranslated region are most preferred.
  • Potential antagonists according to the invention also include catalytic RNA, or a ribozyme (See, e.g., PCT International Publication WO 90/11364, published
  • ribozymes that cleave mRNA at site specific recognition sequences can be used to destroy FGF-10 mRNAs
  • the use of hammerhead ribozymes is preferred.
  • Hammerhead ribozymes cleave mRNAs at locations dictated by flanking regions that form complementary base pairs with the target mRNA. The sole requirement is that the target mRNA have the following sequence of two bases: 5'-UG-3'.
  • the construction and production of hammerhead ribozymes is well known in the art and is described more fully in Haseloff and Gerlach, Nature 334:585-591 (1988).
  • the ribozyme is engineered so that the cleavage recognition site is located near the 5' end of the FGF-10 mRNA; i.e., to increase efficiency and minimize the intracellular accumulation of non-functional mRNA transcripts.
  • the ribozymes of the invention can be composed of modified oligonucleotides (e.g. for improved stability, targeting, etc.) and should be delivered to cells which express FGF-10 in vivo.
  • DNA constructs encoding the ribozyme may be introduced into the cell in the same manner as described above for the introduction of antisense encoding DNA.
  • a preferred method of delivery involves using a DNA construct "encoding" the ribozyme under the control of a strong constitutive promoter, such as, for example, pol III or pol II promoter, so that transfected cells will produce sufficient quantities of the ribozyme to destroy endogenous FGF-10 messages and inhibit translation.
  • Antagonist/agonist compounds may be employed to inhibit the cell growth and proliferation effects of the polypeptides of the present invention on neoplastic cells and tissues, i.e. stimulation of angiogenesis of tumors, and, therefore, retard or prevent abnormal cellular growth and proliferation, for example, in tumor formation or growth.
  • the antagonist/agonist may also be employed to prevent hyper-vascular diseases, and prevent the proliferation of epithelial lens cells after extracapsular cataract surgery.
  • Prevention of the mitogenic activity of the polypeptides of the present invention may also be desirous in cases such as restenosis after balloon angioplasty.
  • the antagonist/agonist may also be employed to prevent the growth of scar tissue during wound healing.
  • the antagonist/agonist may also be employed to treat and/or prevent the diseases described herein.
  • Other Activities may also be employed to treat and/or prevent the diseases described herein.
  • polypeptide of the present invention may be employed in treatment for stimulating re- vascularization of ischemic tissues due to various disease conditions such as thrombosis, arteriosclerosis, and other cardiovascular conditions. These polypeptide may also be employed to stimulate angiogenesis and limb regeneration, as discussed above.
  • the polypeptide may also be employed for treating wounds due to injuries, burns, post-operative tissue repair, and ulcers since it has the ability to be mitogenic to various cells of different origins, such as fibroblast cells and skeletal muscle cells, and therefore, facilitate the repair or replacement of damaged or diseased tissue.
  • the polypeptide of the present invention may also be employed stimulate neuronal growth and to treat and/or prevent neuronal damage which occurs in certain neuronal disorders or neuro-degenerative conditions such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, and AIDS-related complex.
  • FGF-10 may have the ability to stimulate chondrocyte growth, therefore, they may be employed to enhance bone and periodontal regeneration and aid in tissue transplants or bone grafts.
  • the polypeptide of the present invention may be also be employed to prevent skin aging due to sunburn by stimulating keratinocyte growth.
  • the FGF-10 polypeptide may also be employed for preventing hair loss, since
  • FGF family members activate hair-forming cells and promote melanocyte growth.
  • the polypeptides of the present invention may be employed to stimulate growth and differentiation of hematopoietic cells and bone ma ⁇ ow cells when used in combination with other cytokines.
  • the FGF-10 polypeptide may also be employed to maintain organs before transplantation or for supporting cell culture of primary tissues.
  • polypeptide of the present invention may also be employed for inducing tissue of mesodermal origin to differentiate in early embryos.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10 may also increase or decrease the differentiation or proliferation of embryonic stem cells, besides, as discussed above, hematopoietic lineage.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10 may also be used to modulate mammalian characteristics, such as body height, weight, hair color, eye color, skin, percentage of adipose tissue, pigmentation, size, and shape (e.g., cosmetic surgery).
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF-10 may be used to modulate mammalian metabolism affecting catabolism, anabolism, processing, utilization, and storage of energy.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10 may be used to change a mammal's mental state or physical state by influencing biorhythms, caricadic rhythms, depression (including depressive disorders), tendency for violence, tolerance for pain, reproductive capabilities (preferably by Activin or Inhibin-like activity), hormonal or endocrine levels, appetite, libido, memory, stress, or other cognitive qualities.
  • FGF-10 polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of FGF- 10 may also be used as a food additive or preservative, such as to increase or decrease storage capabilities, fat content, lipid, protein, carbohydrate, vitamins, minerals, cofactors or other nutritional components.
  • hosts include, but are not limited to, human, murine, rabbit, goat, guinea pig, camel, horse, mouse, rat, hamster, pig, micro-pig, chicken, goat, cow, sheep, dog, cat, non- human primate, and human.
  • the host is a mouse, rabbit, goat, guinea pig, chicken, rat, hamster, pig, sheep, dog or cat.
  • the host is a mammal.
  • the host is a human.
  • Example 1 Isolation of the FGF-10 cDNA Clone From the Deposited Sample & In vitro Expression
  • the deposited clone is transformed into a suitable host (such as XL-1 Blue (Stratagene)) using techniques known to those of skill in the art, such as those provided by the vector supplier or in related publications or patents.
  • the transformants are plated on 1.5% agar plates (containing the appropriate selection agent, e.g., ampicillin) to a density of about 150 transformants (colonies) per plate.
  • a single colony is then used to generate DNA using nucleic acid isolation techniques well known to those skilled in the art. (e.g., Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 2nd Edit., (1989), Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press.)
  • two primers of 17-20 nucleotides derived from both ends of the SEQ ID NO: l are synthesized and used to amplify the FGF-10 cDNA using the deposited cDNA plasmid as a template.
  • the polymerase chain reaction is ca ⁇ ied out under routine conditions, for instance, in 25 ul of reaction mixture with 0.5 ug of the above cDNA template.
  • a convenient reaction mixture is 1.5-5 mM MgCl 2 , 0.01% (w/v) gelatin, 20 uM each of dATP, dCTP, dGTP, dTTP, 25 pmol of each primer and 0.25 Unit of Taq polymerase.
  • Thirty five cycles of PCR (denaturation at 94 degree C for 1 min; annealing at 55 degree C for 1 min; elongation at 72 degree C for 1 min) are performed with a Perkin-Elmer Cetus automated thermal cycler.
  • the amplified product is analyzed by agarose gel electrophoresis and the DNA band with expected molecular weight is excised and purified.
  • the PCR product is verified to be the selected sequence by subcloning and sequencing the DNA product.
  • RNA oligonucleotide is ligated to the 5' ends of a population of RNA presumably containing full-length gene RNA transcripts.
  • a primer set containing a primer specific to the ligated RNA oligonucleotide and a primer specific to a known sequence of the FGF-10 gene of interest is used to PCR amplify the 5' portion of the FGF-10 full-length gene. This amplified product may then be sequenced and used to generate the full length gene.
  • RNA isolation can then be treated with phosphatase if necessary to eliminate 5' phosphate groups on degraded or damaged RNA which may interfere with the later RNA ligase step.
  • the phosphatase should then be inactivated and the RNA treated with tobacco acid pyrophosphatase in order to remove the cap structure present at the 5' ends of messenger RNAs. This reaction leaves a 5' phosphate group at the 5' end of the cap cleaved RNA which can then be ligated to an RNA oligonucleotide using T4 RNA ligase.
  • This modified RNA preparation is used as a template for first strand cDNA synthesis using a gene specific oligonucleotide.
  • the first strand synthesis reaction is used as a template for PCR amplification of the desired 5' end using a primer specific to the ligated RNA oligonucleotide and a primer specific to the known sequence of the gene of interest.
  • the resultant product is then sequenced and analyzed to confirm that the 5' end sequence belongs to the FGF-10 gene.
  • the FGF-10 cDNA was transcribed and translated in vitro to determine the size of the translatable polypeptide encoded by the full length and partial FGF-10 cDNA.
  • the full length and partial cDNA inserts of FGF-10 in the pBluescript SK vector were amplified by PCR with three paris of primers, 1) M13-reverse and forward primers; 2) M13-reverse primer and FGF primer P20; 3) M13-reverse primer and FGF primer P22.
  • the sequence of these primers as follows.
  • This sequence is located upstream of the 5' end of the FGF-10 cDNA insert in the pBluescript vector and is in an anti-sense orientation as the cDNA.
  • a T3 promoter sequence is located between this primer and the FGF-10 cDNA.
  • FGF primer P20 5'-GTGAGATCTGAGGGAAGAAGGGGA-3' (SEQ ID NO:24)
  • FGF primer P22 The 15 bp sequence of this primer on the 3' prime is anti-sense to the FGF-10 cDNA sequence bp 780-766, which is 12 bp downstream from the stop codon.
  • FGF primer P22 The 15 bp sequence of this primer on the 3' prime is anti-sense to the FGF-10 cDNA sequence bp 780-766, which is 12 bp downstream from the stop codon.
  • PCR products that encode the full polypeptide of FGF-10. Approximately 1 ug of PCR product from first pair of primers, 0.3 ug from second pair of primers, 0.3 ug from third pair of primers were used for in vitro transcription/translation. The in vitro transcription/translation reaction was performed in a 25 ul of volume, using the TNT ® Coupled Reticulocyte Lysate Systems (Promega, CAT# L4950).
  • the reaction contains 12.5 ul of TNT ® rabbit reticulocyte lysate 2 ul of TNT ® reaction buffer, 1 ul of T3 polymerase, 1 ul of 1 mM amino acid mixture (minus methionine), 4 ul of 35 S-methionine (>1000 Ci/mmol, 10 mCi/ml), 1 ul of 40 U/ul; RNasin ribonuclease inhibitor, 0.5 or 1 ug of PCR products. Nuclease-free H2O were added to bring the volume to 25 ul. The reaction was incubated at 30°C for 2 hours. Five microliters of the reaction product was analyzed on a 4-20% gradient SDS PAGE gel.
  • PCR products containing the full length FGF-10 cDNA and the cDNA missing ⁇ 340 bp and ⁇ 140 bp in the 3' un-translated region (3'-UTR) produced the same length of translated products, whose molecular weights are estimated to be around 19 kd (lanes 1-3).
  • the DNA sequence encoding FGF-10 ATCC # 75696, is initially amplified using PCR oligonucleotide primers corresponding to the 5' sequences of the processed protein (minus the signal peptide sequence) and the vector sequences 3' to the gene. Additional nucleotides corresponding to the gene are added to the 5' and 3 ' sequences.
  • the restriction enzyme sites correspond to the restriction enzyme sites on the bacterial expression vector pQE60 (Qiagen, Inc. Chatsworth, CA 91311).
  • pQE-60 encodes antibiotic resistance (Amp r ), a bacterial origin of replication (ori), an IPTG- regulatable promoter operator (P/O), a ribosome binding site (RBS), a 6-His tag and restriction enzyme sites.
  • pQE-60 was then digested with Ncol and Bglll.
  • the amplified sequences are ligated into pQE-60 and are inserted in frame with the sequence encoding for the histidine tag and the ribosome binding site (RBS).
  • the ligation mixture is then used to transform E.
  • M15/rep 4 coli strain M15/rep 4 (Qiagen, Inc.) by the procedure described in Sambrook, J. et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Laboratory Press, (1989). M15/rep4 contains multiple copies of the plasmid pREP4, which expresses the lad repressor and also confers kanamycin resistance (Kan r ). Transformants are identified by their ability to grow on LB plates and ampicillin/kanamycin resistant colonies were selected. Plasmid DNA is isolated and confirmed by restriction analysis. Clones containing the desired constructs are grown overnight (O/N) in liquid culturein LB media supplemented with both Amp (100 ug/ml) and Kan (25 ug/ml).
  • the O/N culture is used to inoculate a large culture at a ratio of 1:100 to 1:250.
  • the cells are grown to an optical density 600 (O.D. 600 ) of between 0.4 and 0.6.
  • IPTG Isopropyl-B-D-thiogalacto pyranoside
  • IPTG induces by inactivating the lad repressor, clearing the P/O leading to increased gene expression.
  • Cells are grown an extra 3 to 4 hours. Cells are then harvested by centrifugation. The cell pellet is solubilized in the chaotropic agent 6 Molar Guanidine HCI.
  • solubilized FGF-10 is purified from this solution by chromatography on a Nickel- Chelate column under conditions that allow for tight binding by proteins containing the 6-His tag (Hochuli, E. et al., J. Chromatography 411 : 177-184 (1984)).
  • the proteins are eluted from the column in 6 molar guanidine HCI pH 5.0 and for the purpose of renaturation adjusted to 3 molar guanidine HCI, lOOmM sodium phosphate, 10 mmolar glutathione (reduced) and 2 mmolar glutathione (oxidized). After incubation in this solution for 12 hours the proteins are dialyzed to 10 mmolar sodium phosphate.
  • the present invention further includes an expression vector comprising phage operator and promoter elements operatively linked to a FGF-10 polynucleotide, called pHE4a.
  • This vector contains: 1) a neomycinphosphotransf erase gene as a selection marker, 2) an E. coli origin of replication, 3) a T5 phage promoter sequence, 4) two lac operator sequences, 5) a Shine-Delgarno sequence, and 6) the lactose operon repressor gene (laclq).
  • the origin of replication (oriC) is derived from pUC19 (LTI, Gaithersburg, MD). The promoter sequence and operator sequences are made synthetically.
  • DNA can be inserted into the pHEa by restricting the vector with Ndel and Xbal, BamHI, Xhol, or Asp718, running the restricted product on a gel, and isolating the larger fragment (the stuffer fragment should be about 310 base pairs).
  • the DNA insert is generated according to the PCR protocol described above, using PCR primers having restriction sites for Ndel (5' primer) and Xbal, BamHI, Xhol, or Asp718 (3' primer).
  • the PCR insert is gel purified and restricted with compatible enzymes.
  • the insert and vector are ligated according to standard protocols.
  • the engineered vector could easily be substituted in the above protocol to express protein in a bacterial system.
  • Example 3 Cloning and expression of FGF-10 in a baculovirus expression system
  • the DNA sequence encoding the full length FGF-10 protein, ATCC # 75696, is amplified using PCR oligonucleotide primers corresponding to the 5' and 3 ' sequences of the gene.
  • the amplified sequences are isolated from a 1% agarose gel using a commercially available kit ("Geneclean,” BIO 101 Inc., La Jolla, Ca.). The fragment is then digested with the respective endonucleases and purified again on a 1% agarose gel. This fragment is designated F2.
  • the vector pA2 (modifications of pVL941 vector, discussed below) is used for the expression of the proteins using the baculovirus expression system (for review see: Summers, M.D. and Smith, G.E. 1987, A manual of methods for baculovirus vectors and insect cell culture procedures, Texas Agricultural Experimental Station Bulletin No. 1555).
  • This expression vector contains the strong polyhedrin promoter of the Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcMNPV) followed by the recognition sites for the restriction endonucleases BamHI and Xbal.
  • the polyadenylation site of the simian virus (SV)40 is used for efficient polyadenylation.
  • SV simian virus
  • the beta-galactosidase gene from E.coli is inserted in the same orientation as the polyhedrin promoter followed by the polyadenylation signal of the polyhedrin gene.
  • the polyhedrin sequences are flanked at both sides by viral sequences for the cell-mediated homologous recombination of co-transfected wild-type viral DNA.
  • baculovirus vectors could be used in place of pA2 such as pRGl, pAc373, pVL941 and pAcIMl (Luckow, V.A. and Summers, M.D., Virology, 170:31-39).
  • the plasmid is digested with the restriction enzymes and dephosphorylated using calf intestinal phosphatase by procedures known in the art.
  • the DNA is then isolated from a 1% agarose gel using the commercially available kit ("Geneclean" BIO 101 Inc., La Jolla, Ca.). This vector DNA is designated V2.
  • Fragment F2 and the dephosphorylated plasmid V2 are ligated with T4 DNA ligase.
  • E.coli DH5 alpha cells are then transformed and bacteria identified that contained the plasmid (pBacFGF-10) using the respective restriction enzymes. The sequence of the cloned fragment are confirmed by DNA sequencing.
  • 5 ⁇ g of the plasmid pBacFGF-10 is co-transfected with 1.0 ⁇ g of a commercially available linearized baculovirus ("BaculoGold baculovirus DNA", Pharmingen, San Diego, CA.) using the lipofection method (Feigner et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 84:7413-7417 (1987)).
  • l g of BaculoGold virus DNA and 5 ⁇ g of the plasmid is mixed in a sterile well of microtiter plates containing 50 ⁇ l of serum free Grace's medium (Life Technologies Inc., Gaithersburg, MD).
  • plaque assays performed similar as described by Summers and Smith (supra). As a modification an agarose gel with "Blue Gal” (Life Technologies Inc., Gaithersburg) is used which allows an easy isolation of blue stained plaques. (A detailed description of a "plaque assay” can also be found in the user's guide for insect cell culture and baculovirology distributed by Life Technologies Inc., Gaithersburg, page 9-10).
  • Four days after the serial dilution the virus is added to the cells and blue stained plaques are picked with the tip of an Eppendorf pipette. The agar containing the recombinant viruses is then resuspended in an Eppendorf tube containing 200 ⁇ of Grace's medium.
  • the agar is removed by a brief centrifugation and the supernatant containing the recombinant baculovirus is used to infect Sf9 cells seeded in 35 mm dishes. Four days later the supernatants of these culture dishes are harvested and then stored at 4°C.
  • Sf9 cells are grown in Grace's medium supplemented with 10% heat- inactivated FBS.
  • the cells are infected with the recombinant baculovirus V-FGF-10 at a multiplicity of infection (MOI) of 2.
  • MOI multiplicity of infection
  • the medium is removed and replaced with SF900 II medium minus methionine and cysteine (Life Technologies Inc., Gaithersburg). 42 hours later 5 //Ci of 35s_ mem ionine and 5 ⁇ C 35s cysteine (Amersham) are added.
  • the cells are further incubated for 16 hours before they are harvested by centrifugation and the labelled proteins visualized by SDS-PAGE and autoradiography. Microsequencing of the amino acid sequence of the amino terminus of purified protein may be used to determine the amino terminal sequence of the produced FGF- 10 protein.
  • plasmids FGF-10-HA derived from a vector pcDNA3/Amp (Invitrogen) containing: 1) SV40 origin of replication, 2) ampicillin resistance gene, 3) E.coli replication origin, 4) CMV promoter followed by a polylinker region, an SV40 intron and polyadenylation site.
  • DNA fragments encoding the entire FGF-10 precursor and an HA tag fused in frame to the 3' end is cloned into the polylinker region of the vector, therefore, the recombinant protein expression is directed under the CMV promoter.
  • the HA tag corresponds to an epitope derived from the influenza hemagglutinin protein as previously described (I. Wilson, H. Niman, R.
  • HA tag to the target protein allows easy detection of the recombinant protein with an antibody that recognizes the HA epitope.
  • the plasmid construction strategy is described as follows:
  • the DNA sequence encoding FGF-10 is constructed by PCR using two primers: the 5' primer contains a BamHI site followed by 18 nucleotides of coding sequence starting from the initiation codon; the 3' primer contains complementary sequences to an Xhol site, translation stop codon, HA tag and the last 18 nucleotides of the FGF-10 coding sequence (not including the stop codon). Therefore, the PCR product contains a BamHI site, coding sequence followed by HA tag fused in frame, a translation termination stop codon next to the HA tag, and an Xhol site.
  • the PCR amplified DNA fragments and the vector, pcDNA3/Amp, are digested with the respective restriction enzymes and ligated.
  • the ligation mixture is transformed into E. coli strain SURE (available from Stratagene Cloning Systems, La Jolla, CA 92037) the transformed culture is plated on ampicillin media plates and resistant colonies are selected. Plasmid DNA is isolated from transformants and examined by restriction analysis for the presence of the conect fragment.
  • FGF-10 COS cells are transfected with the expression vector by DEAE-DEXTRAN method (J. Sambrook, E. Fritsch, T. Maniatis, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Laboratory Press, (1989)).
  • FGF-10-HA protein The expression of the FGF-10-HA protein is detected by radiolabelling and immunoprecipitation method (E. Harlow, D. Lane, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, (1988)). Cells are labelled for 8 hours with 35s-cysteine two days post transfection. Culture media is then collected and cells are lysed with detergent (RIPA buffer (150 mM NaCI, 1% NP-40, 0.1% SDS, 1% NP- 40, 0.5% DOC, 50mM Tris, pH 7.5) (Wilson, I. et al., Id. 37:767 (1984)). Both cell lysate and culture media are precipitated with an HA specific monoclonal antibody. Proteins precipitated are analyzed on 15% SDS-PAGE gels.
  • RIPA buffer 150 mM NaCI, 1% NP-40, 0.1% SDS, 1% NP- 40, 0.5% DOC, 50mM Tris, pH 7.5
  • FGF-10 polypeptide can be expressed in a mammalian cell.
  • a typical mammalian expression vector contains a promoter element, which mediates the initiation of transcription of mRNA, a protein coding sequence, and signals required for the termination of transcription and polyadenylation of the transcript. Additional elements include enhancers, Kozak sequences and intervening sequences flanked by donor and acceptor sites for RNA splicing. Highly efficient transcription is achieved with the early and late promoters from SV40, the long terminal repeats (LTRs) from Retroviruses, e.g., RSV, HTLVI, HIVI and the early promoter of the cytomegalovirus (CMV).
  • LTRs long terminal repeats
  • Suitable expression vectors for use in practicing the present invention include, for example, vectors such as pSVL and pMSG (Pharmacia, Uppsala, Sweden), pRSVcat (ATCC 37152), pSV2DHFR (ATCC 37146), pBC12MI (ATCC 67109), pCMVSport 2.0, and pCMVSport 3.0.
  • Mammalian host cells that could be used include, human Hela, 293, H9 and Jurkat cells, mouse NIH3T3 and C127 cells, Cos 1, Cos 7 and CV l, quail QCl-3 cells, mouse L cells and Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells.
  • FGF-10 polypeptide can be expressed in stable cell lines containing the FGF-10 polynucleotide integrated into a chromosome.
  • the co- transfection with a selectable marker such as DHFR, gpt, neomycin, hygromycin allows the identification and isolation of the transfected cells.
  • the transfected FGF-10 gene can also be amplified to express large amounts of the encoded protein.
  • the DHFR (dihydrofolate reductase) marker is useful in developing cell lines that carry several hundred or even several thousand copies of the gene of interest. (See, e.g., Alt, F. W., et al., J. Biol. Chem. 253:1357-1370 (1978); Hamlin, J. L. and Ma, C, Biochem. et Biophys. Acta, 1097: 107-143 (1990); Page, M. J. and Sydenham, M.
  • Another useful selection marker is the enzyme glutamine synthase (GS) (Murphy et al., Biochem J . 227:277-279 (1991); Bebbington et al., Bio/Technology 10: 169-175 (1992).
  • GS glutamine synthase
  • the mammalian cells are grown in selective medium and the cells with the highest resistance are selected.
  • These cell lines contain the amplified gene(s) integrated into a chromosome.
  • Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) and NSO cells are often used for the production of proteins.
  • Derivatives of the plasmid pSV2-DHFR (ATCC Accession No. 37146), the expression vectors pC4 (ATCC Accession No. 209646) and pC6 (ATCC Accession No.209647) contain the strong promoter (LTR) of the Rous Sarcoma Virus (Cullen et al., Molecular and Cellular Biology, 438-447 (March, 1985)) plus a fragment of the CMV-enhancer (Boshart et al., Cell 41:521-530 (1985).) Multiple cloning sites, e.g. , with the restriction enzyme cleavage sites BamHI, Xbal and Asp718, facilitate the cloning of FGF-10.
  • the vectors also contain the 3' intron, the polyadenylation and termination signal of the rat preproinsulin gene, and the mouse DHFR gene under control of the SV40 early promoter.
  • the plasmid pC6 or pC4 is digested with appropriate restriction enzymes and then dephosphorylated using calf intestinal phosphates by procedures known in the art.
  • the vector is then isolated from a 1% agarose gel.
  • the cDNA sequence encoding the full length FGF-10 protein in the deposited clone is amplified using PCR oligonucleotide primers corresponding to the 5' and 3 ' sequences of the gene. If a naturally occurring signal sequence is used to produce a secreted protein, the vector does not need a second signal peptide. Alternatively, if a naturally occuning signal sequence is not used, the vector can be modified to include a heterologous signal sequence in an effort to secrete the protein from the cell. (See, e.g., WO 96/34891.)
  • the amplified fragment is then digested with the appropriate restriction enzyme and purified on a 1% agarose gel using a commercially available kit ("Geneclean," BIO 101 Inc., La Jolla, Ca.).
  • the isolated fragment and the dephosphorylated vector are then ligated with T4 DNA ligase.
  • E. coli HB101 or XL-1 Blue cells are then transformed and bacteria are identified that contain the fragment inserted into plasmid pC6 or pC4 using, for instance, restriction enzyme analysis.
  • Chinese hamster ovary cells lacking an active DHFR gene is used for transfection.
  • Five ⁇ g of the expression plasmid pC6 or pC4 is cotransfected with 0.5 ug of the plasmid pSVneo using lipofectin (Feigner et al., supra).
  • the plasmid pSV2- neo contains a dominant selectable marker, the neo gene from Tn5 encoding an enzyme that confers resistance to a group of antibiotics including G418.
  • the cells are seeded in alpha minus MEM supplemented with 1 mg/ml G418.
  • the cells are trypsinized and seeded in hybridoma cloning plates (Greiner, Germany) in alpha minus MEM supplemented with 10, 25, or 50 ng/ml of metothrexate plus 1 mg/ml G418. After about 10-14 days single clones are trypsinized and then seeded in 6-well petri dishes or 10 ml flasks using different concentrations of methotrexate (50 nM, 100 nM, 200 nM, 400 nM, 800 nM).
  • methotrexate 50 nM, 100 nM, 200 nM, 400 nM, 800 nM.
  • Clones growing at the highest concentrations of methotrexate are then transferred to new 6-well plates containing even higher concentrations of methotrexate (1 uM, 2 uM, 5 uM, 10 mM, 20 mM). The same procedure is repeated until clones are obtained which grow at a concentration of 100 - 200 uM.
  • Expression of FGF-10 is analyzed, for instance, by SDS-PAGE and Western blot or by reversed phase HPLC analysis.
  • Example 5 Isolation of FGF-10 Genomic Clones A human genomic PI library (Genomic Systems, Inc.) is screened by PCR using primers selected for the cDNA sequence corresponding to SEQ ID NO: l., according to the method described in Example 1. (See also, Sambrook.)
  • Example 6 Tissue Distribution of FGF-10 Polypeptides
  • Tissue distribution of mRNA expression of FGF-10 is determined using protocols for Northern blot analysis, described by, among others, Sambrook et al.
  • a FGF-10 probe produced by the method described in Example 1 is labeled with P 32 using the rediprimeTM DNA labeling system (Amersham Life Science), according to manufacturer's instructions.
  • the probe is purified using CHROMA SPIN-100TM column (Clontech Laboratories, Inc.), according to manufacturer's protocol number PT 1200-1. The purified labeled probe is then used to examine various human tissues for mRNA expression.
  • Tissue Northern (MTN) blots containing various human tissues (H) or human immune system tissues (IM) (Clontech) are examined with the labeled probe using ExpressHybTM hybridization solution (Clontech) according to manufacturer's protocol number PT 1190-1. Following hybridization and washing, the blots are mounted and exposed to film at -70 degree C overnight, and the films developed according to standard procedures.
  • MTN Tissue Northern
  • H human tissues
  • IM human immune system tissues
  • the nylon blot with 2 ug of poly A+ mRNA from several human adult tissues bound to the membrane was obtained from Clontech Laboratories, Inc. Palo Alto, CA.
  • the blot was hybridized with the entire FGF-10 cDNA labeled with radioactive dCTP by random-primed labeling.
  • the hybridization was performed in 0.7% SDS, 0.5 M NaPO4, pH 7.2, and 1% BSA at 65°C overnight. Following 2 X 30 min wash in 0.2 X SSC, 0.1% SDS at 65°C, the blot was exposed to X-ray film with intensifying screen overnight. See Figure 5.
  • An oligonucleotide primer set is designed according to the sequence at the 5' end of SEQ ID NO: l. This primer preferably spans about 100 nucleotides.
  • This primer set is then used in a polymerase chain reaction under the following set of conditions : 30 seconds, 95 degree C; 1 minute, 56 degree C; 1 minute, 70 degree C.
  • This cycle is repeated 32 times followed by one 5 minute cycle at 70 degree C.
  • Chromosome mapping is determined by the presence of an approximately 100 bp PCR fragment in the particular somatic cell hybrid.
  • the following alternative method can be used to purify FGF-10 polypeptide expressed in E coli when it is present in the form of inclusion bodies. Unless otherwise specified, all of the following steps are conducted at 4-10 degree C. Upon completion of the production phase of the E. coli fermentation, the cell culture is cooled to 4-10 degree C and the cells harvested by continuous centrifugation at 15,000 rpm (Heraeus Sepatech). On the basis of the expected yield of protein per unit weight of cell paste and the amount of purified protein required, an appropriate amount of cell paste, by weight, is suspended in a buffer solution containing 100 mM Tris, 50 mM EDTA, pH 7.4. The cells are dispersed to a homogeneous suspension using a high shear mixer.
  • the cells are then lysed by passing the solution through a microfluidizer (Microfuidics, Corp. or APV Gaulin, Inc.) twice at 4000-6000 psi.
  • the homogenate is then mixed with NaCI solution to a final concentration of 0.5 M NaCI, followed by centrifugation at 7000 xg for 15 min.
  • the resultant pellet is washed again using 0.5M NaCI, 100 mM Tris, 50 mM EDTA, pH 7.4.
  • the resulting washed inclusion bodies are solubilized with 1.5 M guanidine hydrochloride (GuHCl) for 2-4 hours.
  • the pellet After 7000 xg centrifugation for 15 min., the pellet is discarded and the polypeptide containing supernatant is incubated at 4 degree C overnight to allow further GuHCl extraction.
  • the GuHCl solubilized protein is refolded by quickly mixing the GuHCl extract with 20 volumes of buffer containing 50 mM sodium, pH 4.5, 150 mM NaCI, 2 mM EDTA by vigorous stirring. The refolded diluted protein solution is kept at 4 degree C without mixing for 12 hours prior to further purification steps.
  • a previously prepared tangential filtration unit equipped with 0.16 um membrane filter with appropriate surface area e.g., Filtron
  • 40 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0 is employed.
  • the filtered sample is loaded onto a cation exchange resin (e.g., Poros HS-50, Perseptive Biosystems).
  • the column is washed with 40 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0 and eluted with 250 mM, 500 mM, 1000 mM, and 1500 mM NaCI in the same buffer, in a stepwise manner.
  • the absorbance at 280 nm of the effluent is continuously monitored. Fractions are collected and further analyzed by SDS-PAGE.
  • Fractions containing the FGF-10 polypeptide are then pooled and mixed with 4 volumes of water.
  • the diluted sample is then loaded onto a previously prepared set of tandem columns of strong anion (Poros HQ-50, Perseptive Biosystems) and weak anion (Poros CM-20, Perseptive Biosystems) exchange resins.
  • the columns are equilibrated with 40 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0. Both columns are washed with 40 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0, 200 mM NaCI.
  • CM-20 column is then eluted using a 10 column volume linear gradient ranging from 0.2 M NaCI, 50 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0 to 1.0 M NaCI, 50 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.5. Fractions are collected under constant A 280 monitoring of the effluent. Fractions containing the polypeptide (determined, for instance, by 16% SDS-PAGE) are then pooled.
  • the resultant FGF-10 polypeptide should exhibit greater than 95% purity after the above refolding and purification steps. No major contaminant bands should be observed from Commassie blue stained 16% SDS-PAGE gel when 5 ug of purified protein is loaded.
  • the purified FGF-10 protein can also be tested for endotoxin/LPS contamination, and typically the LPS content is less than 0.1 ng/ml according to LAL assays.
  • oligonucleotide primers of about 15-25 nucleotides are derived from the desired 5' and 3' positions of a polynucleotide of SEQ ID NO: l. The 5' and 3' positions of the primers are determined based on the desired FGF-10 polynucleotide fragment. An initiation and stop codon are added to the 5' and 3' primers respectively, if necessary, to express the FGF-10 polypeptide fragment encoded by the polynucleotide fragment.
  • Preferred FGF-10 polynucleotide fragments are those encoding the N-terminal and C-terminal deletion mutants disclosed above in the "Polynucleotide and Polypeptide Fragments" section of the Specification. Additional nucleotides containing restriction sites to facilitate cloning of the FGF-10 polynucleotide fragment in a desired vector may also be added to the 5' and 3' primer sequences.
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotide fragment is amplified from genomic DNA or from the deposited cDNA clone using the appropriate PCR oligonucleotide primers and conditions discussed herein or known in the art.
  • the FGF-10 polypeptide fragments encoded by the FGF-10 polynucleotide fragments of the present invention may be expressed and purified in the same general manner as the full length polypeptides, although routine modifications may be necessary due to the differences in chemical and physical properties between a particular fragment and full length polypeptide.
  • the polynucleotide encoding the FGF-10 polypeptide fragment K-35 to L- 151 is amplified and cloned as follows: A 5' primer is generated comprising a restriction enzyme site followed by an initiation codon in frame with the polynucleotide sequence encoding the N-terminal portion of the polypeptide fragment beginning with K-35.
  • a complementary 3' primer is generated comprising a restriction enzyme site followed by a stop codon in frame with the polynucleotide sequence encoding C-terminal portion of the FGF-10 polypeptide fragment ending with L-151.
  • the amplified polynucleotide fragment and the expression vector are digested with restriction enzymes which recognize the sites in the primers.
  • the digested polynucleotides are then ligated together.
  • the FGF-10 polynucleotide fragment is inserted into the restricted expression vector, preferably in a manner which places the FGF-10 polypeptide fragment coding region downstream from the promoter.
  • the ligation mixture is transformed into competent E. coli cells using standard procedures and as described in the Examples herein. Plasmid DNA is isolated from resistant colonies and the identity of the cloned DNA confirmed by restriction analysis, PCR and DNA sequencing.
  • FGF-10 polypeptides are preferably fused to other proteins. These fusion proteins can be used for a variety of applications. For example, fusion of FGF-10 polypeptides to His-tag, HA-tag, protein A, IgG domains, and maltose binding protein facilitates purification. (See Example 5; see also EP A 394,827; Traunecker, et al., Nature 331:84-86 (1988).) Similarly, fusion to IgG-1, IgG-3, and albumin increases the halflife time in vivo. Nuclear localization signals fused to FGF- 10 polypeptides can target the protein to a specific subcellular localization, while covalent heterodimer or homodimers can increase or decrease the activity of a fusion protein.
  • Fusion proteins can also create chimeric molecules having more than one function. Finally, fusion proteins can increase solubility and/or stability of the fused protein compared to the non-fused protein. All of the types of fusion proteins described above can be made by modifying the following protocol, which outlines the fusion of a polypeptide to an IgG molecule, or the protocol described in the Examples.
  • the human Fc portion of the IgG molecule can be PCR amplified, using primers that span the 5' and 3' ends of the sequence described below. These primers also should have convenient restriction enzyme sites that will facilitate cloning into an expression vector, preferably a mammalian expression vector. For example, if pC4 (Accession No. 209646) is used, the human Fc portion can be ligated into the BamHI cloning site. Note that the 3' BamHI site should be destroyed. Next, the vector containing the human Fc portion is re-restricted with BamHI, linearizing the vector, and FGF-10 polynucleotide, isolated by the PCR protocol described in Example 1, is ligated into this BamHI site.
  • the polynucleotide is cloned without a stop codon, otherwise a fusion protein will not be produced. If the naturally occurring signal sequence is used to produce the secreted protein, pC4 does not need a second signal peptide. Alternatively, if the naturally occu ⁇ ing signal sequence is not used, the vector can be modified to include a heterologous signal sequence.
  • the antibodies of the present invention can be prepared by a variety of methods. (See, Current Protocols, Chapter 2.) As one example of such methods, cells expressing FGF-10 are administered to an animal to induce the production of sera containing polyclonal antibodies. In a prefened method, a preparation of FGF- 10 protein is prepared and purified to render it substantially free of natural contaminants. Such a preparation is then introduced into an animal in order to produce polyclonal antisera of greater specific activity. Monoclonal antibodies specific for FGF-10 protein are prepared using hybridoma technology. (Kohler et al., Nature 256:495 (1975); Kohler et al., Eur. J . Immunol. 6:511 (1976); Kohler et al., Eur.
  • an animal preferably a mouse
  • FGF-10 polypeptide or, more preferably, with a secreted FGF-10 polypeptide-expressing cell.
  • Such polypeptide-expressing cells are cultured in any suitable tissue culture medium, preferably in Earle's modified Eagle's medium supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (inactivated at about 56°C), and supplemented with about 10 g/1 of nonessential amino acids, about 1,000 U/ml of penicillin, and about 100 ⁇ g/ml of streptomycin.
  • the splenocytes of such mice are extracted and fused with a suitable myeloma cell line.
  • Any suitable myeloma cell line may be employed in accordance with the present invention; however, it is preferable to employ the parent myeloma cell line (SP2O), available from the ATCC.
  • SP2O parent myeloma cell line
  • the resulting hybridoma cells are selectively maintained in HAT medium, and then cloned by limiting dilution as described by Wands et al. (Gastroenterology 80:225-232 (1981)). The hybridoma cells obtained through such a selection are then assayed to identify clones which secrete antibodies capable of binding the FGF-10 polypeptide.
  • additional antibodies capable of binding to FGF-10 polypeptide can be produced in a two-step procedure using anti-idiotypic antibodies.
  • Such a method makes use of the fact that antibodies are themselves antigens, and therefore, it is possible to obtain an antibody which binds to a second antibody.
  • protein specific antibodies are used to immunize an animal, preferably a mouse.
  • the splenocytes of such an animal are then used to produce hybridoma cells, and the hybridoma cells are screened to identify clones which produce an antibody whose ability to bind to the FGF-10 protein-specific antibody can be blocked by FGF-10.
  • Such antibodies comprise anti-idiotypic antibodies to the FGF-10 protein-specific antibody and are used to immunize an animal to induce formation of further FGF-10 protein-specific antibodies.
  • an antibody is "humanized". Such antibodies can be produced using genetic constructs derived from hybridoma cells producing the monoclonal antibodies described above. Methods for producing chimeric and humanized antibodies are known in the art and are discussed herein. (See, for review, Morrison, Science 229: 1202 (1985); Oi et al., BioTechniques 4:214 (1986); Cabilly et al., U.S. Patent No.
  • a library of scFvs is constructed from the RNA of human PBLs as described in PCT publication WO 92/01047.
  • To rescue phage displaying antibody fragments approximately 109 E. coli harboring the phagemid are used to inoculate 50 ml of 2xTY containing 1% glucose and 100 ⁇ g/ml of ampicillin (2xTY-AMP-GLU) and grown to an O.D. of 0.8 with shaking.
  • M13 delta gene III is prepared as follows: M13 delta gene III helper phage does not encode gene III protein, hence the phage(mid) displaying antibody fragments have a greater avidity of binding to antigen. Infectious M13 delta gene III particles are made by growing the helper phage in cells harboring a pUC19 derivative supplying the wild type gene III protein during phage morphogenesis. The culture is incubated for 1 hour at 37° C without shaking and then for a further hour at 37°C with shaking. Cells are spun down (IEC-Centra 8,400 r.p.m.
  • Immunotubes (Nunc) are coated overnight in PBS with 4 ml of either 100 ⁇ g/ml or 10 ⁇ g/ml of a polypeptide of the present invention. Tubes are blocked with 2% Marvel-PBS for 2 hours at 37°C and then washed 3 times in PBS. Approximately 1013 TU of phage is applied to the tube and incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature tumbling on an over and under turntable and then left to stand for another 1.5 hours. Tubes are washed 10 times with PBS 0.1% Tween-20 and 10 times with PBS.
  • Phage are eluted by adding 1 ml of 100 mM triethylamine and rotating 15 minutes on an under and over turntable after which the solution is immediately neutralized with 0.5 ml of 1.0M Tris-HCl, pH 7.4. Phage are then used to infect 10 ml of mid-log E. coli TGI by incubating eluted phage with bacteria for 30 minutes at 37°C. The E. coli are then plated on TYE plates containing 1% glucose and 100 ⁇ g/ml ampicillin. The resulting bacterial library is then rescued with delta gene 3 helper phage as described above to prepare phage for a subsequent round of selection. This process is then repeated for a total of 4 rounds of affinity purification with tube- washing increased to 20 times with PBS, 0.1% Tween-20 and 20 times with PBS for rounds 3 and 4.
  • Binders Eluted phage from the 3rd and 4th rounds of selection are used to infect E. coli HB 2151 and soluble scFv is produced (Marks, et al., 1991) from single colonies for assay.
  • ELISAs are performed with microtitre plates coated with either 10 pg/ml of the polypeptide of the present invention in 50 mM bicarbonate pH 9.6. Clones positive in ELISA are further characterized by PCR fingerprinting (see, e.g., PCT publication WO 92/01047) and then by sequencing. These ELISA positive clones may also be further characterized by techniques known in the art, such as, for example, epitope mapping, binding affinity, receptor signal transduction, ability to block or competitively inhibit antibody/antigen binding, and competitive agonistic or antagonistic activity.
  • the following protocol produces a supernatant containing FGF-10 polypeptide to be tested. This supernatant can then be used in the Screening Assays described in Examples 14-21.
  • dilute Poly-D-Lysine (644 587 Boehringer-Mannheim) stock solution (lmg/ml in PBS) 1:20 in PBS (w/o calcium or magnesium 17-516F Biowhittaker) for a working solution of 50ug/ml.
  • PBS w/o calcium or magnesium 17-516F Biowhittaker
  • the transfection should be performed by tag-teaming the following tasks.
  • tags on time is cut in half, and the cells do not spend too much time on PBS.
  • person A aspirates off the media from four 24-well plates of cells, and then person B rinses each well with .5-lml PBS.
  • Person A then aspirates off PBS rinse, and person B, using al2-channel pipetter with tips on every other channel, adds the 200ul of DNA/Lipofectamine/Optimem I complex to the odd wells first, then to the even wells, to each row on the 24-well plates. Incubate at 37 degree C for 6 hours.
  • Leucine 163.75 mg/ml of L-Lysine HCL; 32.34 mg/ml of L-Methionine; 68.48 mg/ml of L-Phenylalainine; 40.0 mg/ml of L-Proline; 26.25 mg/ml of L-Serine;
  • Adjust osmolarity to 327 mOsm) with 2mm glutamine and lx penstrep. (BSA (81-068-3 Bayer) lOOgm dissolved in IL DMEM for a 10% BSA stock solution). Filter the media and collect 50 ul for endotoxin assay in 15ml polystyrene conical. The transfection reaction is terminated, preferably by tag-teaming, at the end of the incubation period. Person A aspirates off the transfection media, while person B adds 1.5ml appropriate media to each well. Incubate at 37 degree C for 45 or 72 hours depending on the media used: 1 %BSA for 45 hours or CHO-5 for 72 hours.
  • the invention further provides a method of identifying the protein in the supernatant characterized by an activity in a particular assay.
  • Jaks-STATs pathway One signal transduction pathway involved in the differentiation and proliferation of cells is called the Jaks-STATs pathway. Activated proteins in the Jaks-STATs pathway
  • Jaks-STATs pathway bind to gamma activation site "GAS” elements or interferon- sensitive responsive element ("ISRE"), located in the promoter of many genes. The binding of a protein to these elements alter the expression of the associated gene.
  • GAS gamma activation site
  • ISRE interferon- sensitive responsive element
  • GAS and ISRE elements are recognized by a class of transcription factors called Signal Transducers and Activators of Transcription, or "STATs.”
  • STATs Signal Transducers and Activators of Transcription
  • Statl and Stat3 are present in many cell types, as is Stat2 (as response to IFN-alpha is widespread).
  • Stat4 is more restricted and is not in many cell types though it has been found in T helper class I, cells after treatment with IL-12.
  • Stat5 was originally called mammary growth factor, but has been found at higher concentrations in other cells including myeloid cells. It can be activated in tissue culture cells by many cytokines.
  • the STATs are activated to translocate from the cytoplasm to the nucleus upon tyrosine phosphorylation by a set of kinases known as the Janus Kinase ("Jaks") family. Jaks represent a distinct family of soluble tyrosine kinases and include Tyk2,
  • a cytokine receptor family capable of activating Jaks, is divided into two groups: (a) Class 1 includes receptors for IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-6, IL-7, IL-9, IL-11, IL-12, IL-15, Epo, PRL, GH, G-CSF, GM-CSF, LIF, CNTF, and thrombopoietin; and (b) Class 2 includes IFN-a, IFN-g, and IL-10.
  • the Class 1 receptors share a conserved cysteine motif (a set of four conserved cysteines and one tryptophan) and a WSXWS motif (a membrane proxial region encoding T ⁇ -Ser-Xaa-Trp-Ser (SEQ ID NO: 12)).
  • Jaks are activated, which in turn activate STATs, which then translocate and bind to GAS elements. This entire process is encompassed in the Jaks-STATs signal transduction pathway.
  • activation of the Jaks-STATs pathway can be used to indicate proteins involved in the proliferation and differentiation of cells.
  • growth factors and cytokines are known to activate the Jaks-STATs pathway. (See Table below.)
  • activators of the Jaks-STATs pathway can be identified.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Micro-Organisms Or Cultivation Processes Thereof (AREA)
  • Preparation Of Compounds By Using Micro-Organisms (AREA)

Abstract

La présente invention se rapporte à une nouvelle protéine humaine appelée Facteur 10 de Croissance des Fibroblastes, et à des polynucléotides isolés codant cette protéine. Elle se rapporte également à des vecteurs, des cellules hôtes et des anticorps ainsi qu'à des méthodes de recombinaison permettant de produire cette protéine. L'invention se rapporte en outre à des méthodes diagnostiques et thérapeutiques qui permettent de diagnostiquer et de traiter des troubles associés à cette nouvelle protéine humaine.
PCT/US2000/013573 1999-05-21 2000-05-18 Facteur 10 de croissance des fibroblastes WO2000071152A1 (fr)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU54408/00A AU5440800A (en) 1999-05-21 2000-05-18 Fibroblast growth factor 10

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13552399P 1999-05-21 1999-05-21
US60/135,523 1999-05-21

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2000071152A1 true WO2000071152A1 (fr) 2000-11-30
WO2000071152A9 WO2000071152A9 (fr) 2001-03-15

Family

ID=22468480

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2000/013573 WO2000071152A1 (fr) 1999-05-21 2000-05-18 Facteur 10 de croissance des fibroblastes

Country Status (2)

Country Link
AU (1) AU5440800A (fr)
WO (1) WO2000071152A1 (fr)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010085842A1 (fr) * 2009-01-27 2010-08-05 Australian Stem Cell Centre Limited Cellules progénitrices épithéliales de poumon, leurs utilisations et leurs procédés de fabrication
WO2013138795A1 (fr) * 2012-03-15 2013-09-19 Permeon Biologics, Inc. Compositions pénétrant les cellules pour l'administration d'anticorps intracellulaires et de groupes fonctionnels intracellulaires semblables aux anticorps, et procédés d'utilisation
WO2014089507A1 (fr) * 2012-12-07 2014-06-12 Permeon Biologics, Inc. Complexes de fgf-10
WO2019195748A1 (fr) * 2018-04-06 2019-10-10 Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation Nanorevêtements structurés pour la stabilisation de constituants de milieux de cellules souches pluripotentes

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5817485A (en) * 1994-03-08 1998-10-06 Human Genome Sciences, Inc. Nucleic acids and cells for recombinant production of fibroblast growth factor-10

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5817485A (en) * 1994-03-08 1998-10-06 Human Genome Sciences, Inc. Nucleic acids and cells for recombinant production of fibroblast growth factor-10

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010085842A1 (fr) * 2009-01-27 2010-08-05 Australian Stem Cell Centre Limited Cellules progénitrices épithéliales de poumon, leurs utilisations et leurs procédés de fabrication
WO2013138795A1 (fr) * 2012-03-15 2013-09-19 Permeon Biologics, Inc. Compositions pénétrant les cellules pour l'administration d'anticorps intracellulaires et de groupes fonctionnels intracellulaires semblables aux anticorps, et procédés d'utilisation
WO2014089507A1 (fr) * 2012-12-07 2014-06-12 Permeon Biologics, Inc. Complexes de fgf-10
WO2019195748A1 (fr) * 2018-04-06 2019-10-10 Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation Nanorevêtements structurés pour la stabilisation de constituants de milieux de cellules souches pluripotentes

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU5440800A (en) 2000-12-12
WO2000071152A9 (fr) 2001-03-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6593112B1 (en) Polynucleotides encoding fibroblast growth factor 15
US6953667B2 (en) Antibodies against human protein HUVDJ43
US20060039905A1 (en) Galectin 11
US20080146505A1 (en) 47 Human Secreted Proteins
EP1165589A1 (fr) Sequences de genes et polypeptides associees au cancer de la prostate de l'homme
US20090305991A1 (en) 33 Human Secreted Proteins
US6605441B1 (en) Antibodies against fibroblast growth factor 11
WO2001012781A1 (fr) 13 proteines associees au cancer du colon et au colon humain
US20050064458A1 (en) 143 human secreted proteins
US20070190612A1 (en) 31 Human Secreted Proteins
US20050019824A1 (en) Fibroblast Growth Factor-10
EP1203018A1 (fr) Prostate humaine 26 et cancer de la prostate associe aux proteines
AU7354700A (en) Human neuropeptide receptor
US20020025553A1 (en) Transforming growth factor alpha HIII
WO2000071152A1 (fr) Facteur 10 de croissance des fibroblastes
US20050026838A1 (en) Fibroblast Growth Factor-13
EP1248801A1 (fr) Polynucleotides, polypeptides et anticorps humains
WO2000071715A1 (fr) Facteur 11 de croissance des fibroblastes
WO2000067775A1 (fr) Facteur de croissance des fibroblastes (fgf) 15
US20030175778A1 (en) Interferon Receptor HKAEF92
WO2001011046A1 (fr) Molecule d'activation lymphocytaire secretee de maniere enrichie par des cellules dendritiques
WO2000071582A1 (fr) Facteur 14 de croissance du fibroblaste
WO2000071567A2 (fr) Facteur de croissance des fibroblastes 13
EP1538161A2 (fr) 32 protéines secretées humaines
EP1244686A1 (fr) Facteur alpha hiii de transformation cellulaire

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: C2

Designated state(s): AE AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: C2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

COP Corrected version of pamphlet

Free format text: PAGES 1/7-7/7, DRAWINGS, REPLACED BY NEW PAGES 1/7-7/7; AFTER RECTIFICATION OF OBVIOUS ERRORS AS AUTHORIZED BY THE INTERNATIONAL SEARCHING AUTHORITY

DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP